LIBRARY OF PRINCETON w 17 m THEOLOGICAL SEMINARY PA 817 , D35 1923 Davis, William Hersey, 1887- 1958. Beginner's grammar of the fl κωλ V War»? Tc of- amant* Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2019 with funding from Princeton Theological Seminary Library https://archive.org/details/beginnersgrarnmar00davi_0 BEGINNER’S GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT WILLIAM HERSEY DAVIS, M.A., Th.D. I ! .■ • 4. · . \ ) . , • ' , ' · ' BEGINNER’S GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT BY WILLIAM HERSEY DAVIS, M.A., Th.D. ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR OF NEW TESTAMENT INTERPRETATION IN THE SOUTHERN BAPTIST THEOLOGICAL SEMINARY LOUISVILLE, KENTUCKY HARPER & BROTHERS PUBLISHERS NEW YORK AND LONDON This book is complete and unabridged in contents, and is manufactured in strict conformity with Government regulations for saving paper. COPYRIGHT, 1923, BY THE SUNDAY SCHOOL BOARD OF THE SOUTHERN BAPTIST CONVENTION BEGINNER'S GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT PRINTED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA A-U To A. T. ROBERTSON, D.D., LL.D., INCOMPARABLE MASTER AND TEACHER OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT This Volume is affectionately Dedicated I . · '· '· . m . ' I . . . . . INTRODUCTION It gives me the greatest pleasure to write some words of an introductory nature to the Beginner's Grammar of the Greek New Testament by my beloved colleague, Dr. W. H. Davis. The need of this book is urgent. Hardly a week goes by that I am not asked to recommend such a book to young minis¬ ters, to pastors, to laymen, to women, many of whom wish to learn how to read the Greek New Testament without the advantage of a teacher. There are a number of grammars that undertake to do this thing, but they all start in the wrong way, except Moulton’s Introduction , which is not well suited to American schools. It is a curious thing how traditionalism in lin¬ guistic teaching has held in slavery so many men who teach Greek today precisely as it was done a hundred years ago. The revolutionary progress made by Brugmann and Delbruck in comparative philol¬ ogy is left to one side for technical scholars. Pro¬ fessor Davis starts the student right. The stand¬ point of Thumb’s revision of Brugmann’s Griechische Grammatik is presented with clearness and precision. The student who starts with Davis’s Beginner's Gram¬ mar can go right on to my Short Grammar of the Greek New Testament without a break or jolt. Then he will be ready for my Grammar of the Greek New vu Vlll INTRODUCTION Testament in the Light of Historical Research. It is only a step further to the Brugmann-Thumb Grie- chische Grammatik and in the same direction. In my experience of thirty-five years as a teacher of the Greek New Testament I have always had num¬ bers of men who floundered over the cases, the prepo¬ sitions, the tenses, the voices, the modes, because they had learned these basal things in the old un¬ scientific way. It is like pulling eye-teeth for such a one to learn that the genitive is not the whence- case, but only the case of kind or genus, and that the ablative is the whence-case. If one gets it into his head that the root idea of tense is time, he may never get it out and he will therefore never under¬ stand the beauty of the Greek tense, the most won¬ derful development in the history of language. Professor Davis is absolutely at home in the new science of language and, I may add, is the most brilliant student of Greek that I have ever had. One should, if possible, take the college course in ancient Greek. He needs this background and this contact with the glorious period of the Greek language. But the New Testament is the chief glory of the Greek tongue, and one can begin it in the right way under Professor Davis’s tutelage. Professor Davis is a master of the papyri and so of the Κοΐηέ in which the New Testament books are written. He is not giving the grammar of the literary Attic, but the grammar of the Koine of the first century A.D. This fact is the second linguistic discovery that has revolutionized the study of the Greek New Testament. Comparative philology and INTRODUCTION iX the papyri discoveries have put the old grammars out of date and all the new ones that ignore the tre¬ mendous progress thus made. It is now known that the Greek of the New Testament is not literary Attic nor is it a peculiar Hebrew jargon or sacred Greek dialect. At bottom it is simply straight Koine of the first century A.D. like that found in the in¬ scriptions of Asia Minor and in the papyri of Egypt. The papyri give us many thousands of examples of the language of the life of the first century a.d. in Egypt. There are business contracts, bills, deeds, marriage contracts, wills, decrees, love letters, busi¬ ness correspondence, anything and everything that made up the life of the people of the time. These velics preserve the language of people of all degrees of culture. The Koine means the language common to people everywhere, not merely the language of the common people. It was the means of commu¬ nication all over the Roman Empire. The most of the papyri examples give the vernacular form of the Koine, but there are specimens of the literary Koine also. The New Testament is mainly in the ver¬ nacular Koine, but it is the vernacular of men of great ability and some of them have a decided liter¬ ary flavor, as we see in the writings of Luke, the Epistles of Paul, the Epistle to the Plebrews. Language changes with the years if it is alive. Changes occur in the meaning of words, and here the papyri give very great help in showing what the words of the New Testament meant in everyday life. Dr. Davis himself has found over two thou¬ sand words in the papyri not given in any of the INTRODUCTION Greek lexicons. But the forms of the Koine show numerous changes from those in the Attic. Dr. Davis’s Grammar gives the forms of the Koine, not of the Attic Greek. Syntax shows some changes also, and these are given rightly. There are Hebraisms and Aramaisms in the Greek New Testament, but the number is nothing like so great as was once thought to be the case. It is natural that Jews who spoke and wrrote the Koine should reveal here and there familiarity with He¬ brew and Aramaic. Even Luke, probably a Greek, has the ear-marks of Aramaic sources and of knowl¬ edge of the Septuagint. But, in the main, the New Testament is written in the current Koine, as one would expect. It should be added that Dr. Davis confines him¬ self to a Beginner’s Grammar. He does not try to teach the ancient Attic on the one hand nor to go over the ground of my Short Grammar on the other. He definitely undertakes to prepare students for the Short Grammar , and he does it with consummate skill. He supplies in masterly fashion the book that was needed. He will smooth the path for the be¬ ginner in the Greek New Testament. He will make it so easy that one will wonder wThy he was so long starting on the road that leads one into the heart of the greatest of all the books of earth, the Greek New Testament. A. T. Robertson Louisville , Ky. NOTE TO FIFTH EDITION In the present edition various corrections and a few additions have been incorporated. A revised and enlarged edition is planned to appear when circum¬ stances warrant it. I thank my colleague, Dr. E. A. McDowell, Jr., for corrections and valuable sugges¬ tions. He is at work on a Koine reader which may be used in conjunction with the Grammar. W. Hersey Davis Louisville , Kentucky , 1942 PREFACE Dr. A. T. Robertson wrote in the Preface to his Short Grammar of the Greek New Testament: “ Three types of New Testament grammars are needed: a beginner’s grammar for men who have had no Greek training, an advanced and complete grammar for scholars and more critical seminary work, an inter¬ mediate handy working grammar for men familiar with the elements of Greek both in school and in the pastorate.” This book is designed to meet the need for the first type. It is intended for those who are beginning the study of the Greek New Testa¬ ment or have an imperfect knowledge of the essen¬ tials of the Greek of the New Testament, and to serve as a preparation for A Short Grammar of the G?eek New Testament (A. T. Robertson). The book is a beginner’s book. It is the result of class-room experience of many years. The need and preparation of a beginner’s class in Greek has de¬ termined the method and order of presentation. The Greek of the New Testament is the Koine of the first century a.d. It is presented as such in this book. The historical development of the Greek lan¬ guage has been kept in mind. No forms or words are given which do not occur in the Greek New Testament. All illustrations and sentences for translation have been taken from the Xll PREFACE New Testament. Those words which are of the most frequent occurrence are presented first. In this book especial stress has been laid upon the meaning of the cases, the prepositions, and the tenses, wherein most beginner’s books have been faulty. The author wishes to record his great indebted¬ ness to his teacher, Professor A. T. Robertson, D.D., LL.D., of the Southern Baptist Theological Semi¬ nary, for instruction and for invaluable assistance. Without his encouragement the work would not have been begun nor would it have been brought to completion. Whatever of worth this book may have, it owes much (if not all) to his rare scholarship and experience of many years as a teacher of the Greek New Testament. In fact his monumental work A Grammar of the Greek New Testament in the Light of Historical Research is the authority from which this book drew at all points. Of course he is not at all responsible for any faults or errors which this book may contain. The names of many writers whose works were consulted, the author cannot here recount, except Brugmann-Thumb ( Griechische Grammatik) . In conclusion the author wishes here to express his thanks to his colleague, Professor F. M. Powell, A.M., Th.D., for valuable criticisms of a great part of the book in manuscript, to his friend, Dr. A. R. Bond, for expert criticism and preparation of the Index, and to his father, Rev. Q. C. Davis, Albe¬ marle, N.C., for his sympathy and guidance. W. Hersey Davis Louisville , Ky. CONTENTS PAGE Introduction by Rev. Prof. A. T. Robertson, D.D. vii Preface . xi PART I: LESSONS LESSON I The Alphabet . ig II Vowels, Diphthongs, Breathing . 21 III Accent . 22 IV Present Indicative Active ... 25 V Second or o-Declension .... 27 VI Declension of o-Stems (Continued) . 30 VII Declension of o-Stems (Continued) . 32 VIII Declension of o-Stems (Concluded) . 35 IX Present Indicative Middle ... 36 X Present Indicative Passive ... 39 XI Imperfect Indicative Active ... 41 XII Prepositions . 43 XIII Imperfect Indicative Middle and Passive . 46 XIV First Declension or Declension of < . ■ ^ \ ' . ■ ' ’ ■ ' BEGINNER’S GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT LESSON I The Alphabet 1. The Greek alphabet had in the Koine or Hellen¬ istic period twenty-four letters. Form of capital letters Name Form of small letters Sounded as 1 A alpha a a in father B beta e b in boy Γ gamma Y g in go Δ delta δ d in day E epsilon ε e (short) in met Z zeta ζ 1 z in daze e in fete H eta η 1 a in mate Θ theta θ th in thin I iota 1 ' \ i in polfce (i in fft 1 The sounds adopted as equivalent to the vowels in Greek are given for the sake of a consistent method of pronunciation. Already — in the first century a.d. some of the vowels and diphthongs were sometimes pronounced alike, as in Modem Greek, and consequently i were confused: thus ει, t, η, j], u, ut, ot (being pronounced alike) were sometimes written one for another; so with ε and at, and o and ω. The confusion of vowels and diphthongs of e sound is called itacism. There is clear evidence that in the first century a.d., β had the twofold pronunciation of b and v (labiodental), as in Modern Greek, and γ had begun to have the value of y (the j value of i before e and i sounds) . 19 20 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR Form of capital letters Name Form of small Sounded as letters K kappa κ k in keep Λ lambda λ 1 in Zed M mu μ m in man N nu V n in net Ξ xi ξ x in lax 0 omicron 0 o (short) in omit Π pi % p in peg P rho Ρ r in run Σ sigma ς s in sit T tau τ t in Zen T upsilon υ u in Fr. t u, Ger. Ύύτ Φ phi φ ph in graphic X chi X ch in Ger. ich, Scotch loch chasm Ψ psi Ψ ps in tops Ω omega ω o (long) in note a. At the end of a word sigma is written ς, else- where σ; as in σεισμός. At first learn the form of the small letters only. Write each letter many, many times, pronouncing its name each time, until the whole alphabet can from memory be uttered and written without hesitation. 2. Every Greek word has as many syllables as it has separate vowels or diphthongs. Learn the sound of each letter. Pronounce aloud the following words: θε-λω, the-lo γρα-φη, gra-phe νο-μος, no-mos λε-γω, le-go no-mos THE ALPHABET £1 βλε-χω, ble-ρό σω-ζω, SO-ZO φι-λος, phi-los κοσ-μος. kos-mos νυξ, nux ε-λω, e-cho α-δελ-φος. a-del-phos ψυ-χη, psu-che αν-θρω-χος. an-thro-pos θε-λη-μα the-le-ma LESSON II Vowels, Diphthongs , Breathing 3. There are seven vowels: α, ε, η, c, ο, υ, ω. η is the long form of ε, and ω is the long form of o; ε and o are always short, η and ω always long. This list, then, corresponds in a way to the English a, e, i, o, u. a, c, u are sometimes long and some¬ times short; the long and short forms are not dis¬ tinguished by separate characters. 4. A diphthong is two vowel sounds fused into one. The diphthongs are: ai in aisle = au in Ger. haws = ou in house ει = ei in height a t αυ ou = ou in group ευ = eu in ieud η u = approximately the same sound as ευ. οι = oi in oil ut = we Also there are α, η, φ; but the t (iota written under¬ neath a vowel is called ‘iota-subscript’) does not affect the sound of the vowel. 5. Many Greek words begin with a sound equivalent to the English h. This sound is indicated by writing a sign (') called the rough breathing over a vowel or 22 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR diphthong at the beginning of a word (over the second vowel of a diphthong). Thus 6Boq = hodos; eupcay.(i) = heurisko. If an initial vowel or diphthong is not pronounced with an h , the sign (’), called the smooth breathing, is written over it. Thus ακούω = akouo; oupavoq = ouranos. · Initial u always has the rough breathing. 6. Write the following in English (Roman) letters in accordance with the equivalents given in I and 4. βάλετε είς τα δεξιά μέρη του χλοιου το δικτυον και ευρησετε. τις άρα ουτος έστιν; ή ψυχή αυτού έφοβηθη. ο\ άνθρωποι έξηλθον έκ του οίκου. Write the following words in Greek characters: kai palin erxato didaskein para ten thalassan. kai sunagetai pros auton ochlos pleistos, hoste auton eis ploion embanta kathesthai. periblepsamenos autous legei ide he meter mou kai hoi adelphoi mou. LESSON III Accent 7. Most Greek words are written with accents. The accents are the acute ('), the grave ('), and the circumflex ('). Thus, λαμβάνει τδν δοΰλον; άκούω τής φωνής. On inspection it will be noticed that the accent stands over the vowel of the accented syllable, and in a diphthong over the second vowel. 8. To us in English accent means a stress of the voice. Also to the native Greeks of today it means simply stress of voice. Originally, however, accents indicated the tone or pitch of the voice in pro¬ nouncing syllables. ACCENT AND PRONUNCIATION 23 In pronunciation we make no distinction between the accents. 9. The last syllable of a word is called the ultima; the next to the last, the penult; and the one before the penult, the antepenult. 10. Learn the following verbs: άγω, I lead , bring , go άκούω, I hear βλέχω, I see , look at γινώσκω, I know γράφω, I write ευρίσκω, I find θέλω, I wish , will λαμβάνω, I take , receive λέγω, I say χέμχω, I send χιστεύω, I believe έχω, I have , hold Write and pronounce aloud each of these words (with the proper breathing and accent) fifteen to twenty times, associating with each word its mean¬ ing, as άγω, a-go, I lead. Notice how the breathing and accent are written together when they occur on the same syllable. άκούω, a-kofi-ό, I hear. Observe that the accent is written over the second vowel of the diphthong ου. See 7·1 11. Observe that: I. Every initial vowel or diph¬ thong has a breathing. 2. The acute accent stands on the penult. The accent of verbs is generally thrown as far back as possible from the last syllable. This is known as recessive accent. Here the position of the accent is determined by the last syllable*. 1 Sections in the Lesson Part are referred to by the simple number (as 7). Sections in the Part dealing with Etymology are referred to by a section sign (§) before the number (as § 6). 24 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR (i) If the last syllable is long, the accent falls on the penult. (2) If the last syllable is short, the ac¬ cent falls on the antepenult. (3) A syllable is long if it contains a long vowel or diphthong; other¬ wise it is short. 3. The ending -g) in each of these words has the force of the personal pronoun I in English. 12. 1. In Greek the endings of verbs generally express the different persons, as I, thou (you), he , we, ye (you), they. What is the ending of each verb in 10? The endings of verbs denoting person are called personal endmgs; they are fragments of old pronouns and are inseparable from the verb. But in English the personal pronouns are sepa¬ rate from the verb and are generally written before it. In the case of most verbs the original personal endings in the singular of the present indicative are no longer apparent in the forms of the -ω- verbs. 2. The verb affirms action (including “ state”). A Greek verb has tense, mode, and voice. Tense expresses the state of the action of the verb; mode gives the manner of affirmation of the verb, how it is made; voice tells how the action of the verb is related to the subject. Verbs indicate affirmation by the personal endings. The student should now begin to make a Greek- English and an English- Greek vocabulary arranged according to the alphabet. A good note book of convenient size should be used. PRESENT INDICATIVE ACTIVE 25 LESSON IV 13. Present Indicative Active 1. λέγ-ω, I am saying , I say 2. λέγ-εις, you are say¬ ing, say 3. λέγ-ει, he, she, or it is saying, says λέγ-ο-μεν, we are saying, say λέγ-ε-τε, ye are saying, say λέγ-ουσι, they are say¬ ing, say Infinitive, λέγ-ειν, to be saying, to say 14. Only in the indicative mode in Greek do the tenses show time absolutely. The main idea of tense is the “kind of action ,” the state of action. Even in the indicative time is a secondary idea. Continued action, or a state of incompletion, is denoted by the present tense, — this kind of action is called durative or linear. The action of the verb is shown in progress, as going on. Observe that the indicative mode in Greek has practically the same declarative force as it has in English. In 13 the subject is represented as acting. 15. To conjugate a verb is to give all the variations in its terminations in the proper order. As given in 13, λέγω is said to be conjugated in the present in ¬ dicative active and present infinitive active. 16. Observe in the conjugation of λέγω: I. The stem λεγ- remains unchanged throughout. 2. A vowel follows this stem. 3. The vowel is 0 before endings that begin with μ or v, and ε before other letters. This vowel (sometimes designated %) is called the thematic vowel. 4. The thematic vowel 26 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR is followed by an ending (the personal ending, see 12) clearly seen in -μεν and -τε of the first and second persons plural. Thus, λέγ-ε-τε is composed of the stem λεγ-, the thematic vowel -ε-, and the personal ending -τε. 17. The personal endings of the active voice, pri¬ mary tenses,1 in their primitive form were these: Singular Plural I. -μι, I -μεν. we 2. -ς (for -σι), thou -τε, ye 3. -σι (for -τι), he , she , it -νσι (for -ντι), they The personal endings are remnants of personal pro¬ nouns. 18. The thematic vowel with the personal ending may be exhibited thus: 1. ο-μι ο-μεν 2. ε-ς (for ε-σι) ε-τε 3· ε-σι (for ετι) ο-νσι (for ο-ντι) a. The first person singular -ω is probably the result of dropping the personal ending -μι and the consequent lengthening of the thematic vowel 0 to oj. b. -εσι and -ετι of the second and third persons singular result in -εις and -ει respectively, c. In -ονσι of the third person plural v is expelled and 0 is lengthened to ου (such vowel change is called compensatory lengthening) . 19. The resultant endings from combination of the thematic vowel and the personal ending are 1 The primary tenses are the present, the future, and the perfect; the secondary tenses are the imperfect, the aorist, and the pluperfect. THE SECOND DECLENSION 27 1. -ω, I 2. -εις, thou 3. -ει, he, she, it -ομεν, we -ετε, ye -ου σι, they These forms must he mastered. Nothing short of absolute mastery of forms will answer the purpose. 20. The infinitive does not have personal endings. It is a verbal substantive in a fixed case form, -ειν is the result of contraction of the thematic vowel ε and the old locative ending -εν (-ενι). 21. Exercises for pronunciation and translation. I. Translate into English: I. βλέπει, άκουομεν, γινώσκετε. 2. λαμβάνουσι, γράφεις, εχει, πιστευομεν. 3· πέμπειν, ευρίσκει, άγετε, γινώσκουσι. 4· θέλομεν βλέπειν, έχομεν, γινώσκετε. 5· «γουσι, λαμ¬ βάνει, έχουσι. II. Translate into Greek: ι. We know, I see, he finds. 2. You send, they know, ye lead. 3. We wish to know, he hears. 4. They write, he has, you believe. LESSON V The Second Declension or Declension of 0 -Stems 22. Vocabulary άρτος, bread θρόνος, throne κόσμος, world λίθος, stone λόγος, word όχλος, crowd τόπος, place χρόνος, time φίλος, fnend νόμος, law $8 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR The student should take up the words of the vocabulary, one at a time, writing and pronouncing (aloud) each word with its proper accent and breath¬ ing until it can be spoken or written without hesita¬ tion. Learn thoroughly the meaning of each word. Do not take up a new word until the preceding word has been thoroughly mastered. 23. Observe: I. All the words in the vocabulary end in -ος. 2. All these substantives belong to the o- declension. 3. They all have an acute accent on the penult. 24. In Greek all nouns (substantive and adjectives) are declined in one of three declensions. Substantives of the second declension have stems in -0-. The stem of a word is that part of it which remains vir¬ tually unchanged in all its forms. 25. The declension of λόγος, of the second declen¬ sion, is: Stem λογο- Plural λόγοι, words λόγων, of words λόγων, from words λόγους, in or at words Singular Nom. λόγος, a word Gen. λόγου, of a word Abl. λόγου, from a word Loc. λόγω, in, οτ at, a word Ins. λόγ cp, iviih or by a word λόγοις, with or by words Dat. λόγω, to or for a word λόγους, to or for words Acc. λόγον, a word λόγους, words Voc. λόγε, O word λόγοι, 0 words a . In the dat. sing, the ending -ω is for -0 + at (dat. case-ending) = ωι = ω. In the loc. sing, the THE SECOND DECLENSION 29 ending -ω is for -ο + i (loc. case-ending) =ot = tot= ω. In the ins. sing, the ending -ω is for -ο + a (ins. case¬ ending) = ω. Because the forms of these cases were pronounced alike, they early came to be written alike, b. The genitive and ablative cases early came to have their forms alike, c. The loc., ins., and dat. plural have the ending of the instru¬ mental case -οις. d. So far as the form goes the vocative is strictly not a case. The endings of λόγος must be absolutely mastered. 26. I. Note that the accent on λόγος remains ori the same syllable throughout the declension. In the declension of a substantive the accent is kept , if possible , on the same syllable on which it rests in the nominative case. 2. The accent of the nominative case must be learned by observation of each word. 27. It is to be observed, from 25, that in Greek there are eight cases (appearing under five case- forms) : Nominative, Genitive, Ablative, Locative, Instrumental, Dative, Accusative, and Vocative. The nominative is the case of the subject, corre¬ sponding roughly to the English nominative. The genitive is the specifying case, expressed in English by the possessive or the objective with of. The ablative is the whence case (origin or separation), expressed in English by off , out, from, away, etc. The locative is the in case, corresponding to the English in, on, among, at, by. The instrumental is the case of means or association, expressed in English by with, by, etc. The dative is the case of personal 30 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR interest (denoting advantage or disadvantage), cor¬ responding to the English to or for, or indirect object. The accusative is the case of extension (whether of thought or verbal action), correspond¬ ing roughly to the English direct object. The voca¬ tive is the case of address. 28. In Greek the case-endings of nouns express the relation of words to each other, and to other parts of the sentence. In English this relation is generally expressed by prepositions (such as of, for , at, on, in, by, etc.) and position of words. 29. Exercises I. I. λίθω, κόσμου, Θρόνων. 2. λόγοι νόμου. 3· λέγει όχλω. 4· λαμβάνομεν άρτον. 5* οχλος ακούει λόγον νόμου. II. ι. In a place, of a world. 2. For a friend, laws of thrones. 3. He takes a stone. 4. We have bread for a world. 5. Ye speak words to crowds. LESSON VI Declension of o-Stems (Continued) 30. Vocabulary άγγελος, angel, messenger διδάσκαλος, teacher άνθρο^χος, man θάνατος, death άχόστολος, apostle κύριος, Lord In άγγελος the first γ is pronounced like ng . γ is always pronounced ng when it comes before κ, γ, χ, or ξ. Some words of the vocabularies so far given occur 1000 times in the New Testament. THE SECOND DECLENSION 31 31. Nouns of the ο-declension whose nominatives end in -ος are generally masculine in gender (rarely feminine) . 32. Declension of the masculine article 6 the, and άνθρωπος : STEM άνθρωπο- Singular Plural Nom. δ άνθρωπος, the man οί άνθρωποι, the men Gen. το 0 ανθρώπου, of the man των ανθρώπων, ofthemen Abl. του ανθρώπου, from the των ανθρώπων, from the man men Loc. τώ άνθρώπω, in or at τοΐς άνθρώποις, in or at the man the men Ins. τώ άνθρώπω, with or by τοΐς άνθρώποις, withorby the man the men Dat. τώ άνθρώπω, to or for τοΐς άνθρώποις, to or for the man the men Acc. τδν άνθρωπον, the man τους άνθρώπους, the men Voc. άνθρωπε, 0 man άνθρωποι, 0 men I 33. Observe: In the declension of άνθρωπος: I. The acute accent stands on the antepenult in the nominative case, and the ending -ος is short. 2. When the ultima becomes long, as in the endings -ου, -φ, -ων, -οις, -ους (3, 4> and 11 > (3)) the accent moves to the penult. Cf. 23, 2. 3. Final -01, although a diphthong, is considered short in de¬ termining the place of accent in the 0- declension. . 34. The acute accent may stand on the ultima, penult, or antepenult. BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR 1. The acute accent cannot stand on the ante¬ penult when the ultima is long, but may stand on the penult. 2. The acute accent (') on a final syllable is changed to the grave (") when another word immedi¬ ately follows without any intervening mark of punctuation. 35. Note: I. The article in the nominative case has no accent, — it is to be pronounced with the fol¬ lowing word. 2. The circumflex accent is written over the gen., abl., loc., inst., dat. cases of the arti¬ cle; and the syllable on which it stands is long. 3. The grave accent in the acc. case of the article. 4. The rough breathing over the nom. case of the article. 36. The definite article δ, the , is an adjective, and, like all adjectives in Greek, it is declined and agrees in gender, number, and case with the word it modifies. 37. Exercises I. I. τώ διδασκάλω, άνθρώχων, τοΐς άχοστόλοις. 2. άγγελοί τού κυρίου, τώ θρόνω του κόσμου. 3· δ φίλος γράφει. 4· δ κύριος λέγει. 5· δ διδάσκαλος γινώσκει τους νόμους. 6. οι φίλοι χέμχουσι άρτον τοΐς άχοστόλοις. II. ι. With a stone, at the place, of the world. 2. He sees the crowd. 3. The man wishes to find bread for the apostles. 4. We see the friends of the Lord. THE SECOND DECLENSION 33 LESSON VII 38. Declension of o -Stems (Continued) Vocabulary άδελφός, brother θεός, God εργον, work Ιερόν, temple ίμάτιον, garment χαιδίον, little child τέκνον, child λαός, people ουρανός, heaven υιός, son The diphthong in ui with the rough breathing, as in υιός, is pronounced like hwee. 39. Declension of ουρανός. Stem ούρανο- Plural ούρανοί ουρανών ουρανών ουρανοΐς ουρανοΐς ουρανοΐς ουρανούς ουρανοί Singular Νοπι.οόρανός Gen. ουρανού Abl. ουρανού Loc. ουρανφ Ins. ουρανφ Dat. ουρανφ Acc. ουρανόν Voc. ουρανέ 40. Note that: ι. In every gen., abl., loc., ins., and dat. the acute (') is changed to the circumflex ("). 2. In the diphthongs -οΰ and -οΐς the circumflex is written over the second vowel. See 7. 41. A long ultima in the gen., abl., loc., ins., and dat. cases, if accented, receives the circumflex accent. 42. Learn the declension of the neuter substantive έργον with the neuter article τό the. Neuter sub¬ stantives of the 0- declension have their nominatives sing, in -ov. 34 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR Stem έργο- Singular Plural Nom. το εργον Gen. του έργου Abl. τοΰ έργου Loc. τφ εργω Ins. τφ εργω Dat. τώ εργω Acc. τό εργον Voc. εργον τα έργα τών έργων τών έργων τοΐς εργοις τοΐς εργοις τοΐς εργοις τά έργα έργα 43. It is to be observed in the declension of εργον: 1. The nom., acc., and voc. cases in the singular have the same ending, -ov; and the same cases in the plural have the ending -a. 2. The inflection of the other cases is the same as that of masculine substantives. 44. The neuter article, τό the , differs in its inflection from the masculine article only in the nom. and acc. cases. 45. Exercises I. I. τφ υίφ του Θεού. 2. ευρίσκουσι τον υιόν ένι τφ ίερφ. 3· δ διδάσκαλος θέλει λέγειν τοΐς τέκνοις. φ & θεός ουρανού πέμπει τους αγγέλους τοΐς άνθρώποις. 5· αδελφοί έχουσι άρτον καί2 ίμάτια τοΐς παιδίοις. II. ι. For the brothers and of the brothers. 2. The friend finds the garments of the children. 3. We see the son in the temple. 4. The teacher wishes to speak to the little child. 1 έν, in , is used with the locative case. 2 καί, and , used more times than any other conjunction in the New Testament. THE SECOND DECLENSION 35 LESSON VIII Declension of o-Stems (Concluded) 46. Vocabulary δούλος, δ, servant δώρον, τό, gift μισθός, ό, pay , wages , χλοίον, τό, boat reward οίκος, ό, house χοτήριον, τό, CUp οίνος, ό, wine χρόσωχον, τό. , face όφθαλμός, ό, eye σάββατον, τό, Sabbath άπδ, prep., from, off. used only with the ablative case in the New Testament. Notice that ' when the breathing and circumflex accent belong to the same vowel, the circumflex is written directly over the breathing, as in οίκος, etc. 47. The following are the declensions of δούλος and δώρον: Stem δούλο- Stem δωρο- Singular Plural Singular Plural Nom. δούλος δούλοι Nom. δώρον δώρα Gen. δούλου δούλων Gen. δώρου δώρων Abl. δούλου δούλων Abl. δώρου δώρων Loc. δούλω δούλοις Loc. δώρφ δώροις Ins. δούλω δούλοις Ins. δώρω δώροις Dat. δούλω δούλοις Dat. δώρα) δώροις Acc. δούλον δούλους Acc. δώρον δώρα Voc. δούλε δούλοι Voc. δώρον δώρα 48. Observe that: i. The circumflex accent (') oc¬ curs on a long syllable only. 2. When the circum¬ flex accent is written on the penult, the last syllable 36 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR is short. 3. When the last syllable becomes long, the circumflex accent is changed to the acute. Cf. 26, 1. 49. The circumflex accent may stand on the ultima or the penult. It cannot stand on the antepenult. The circumflex accent cannot stand on the penult when the ultima is long. When the ultima is short and the penult is long, the penult takes the circum¬ flex accent, if it is to be accented. 50. Exercises I. I. έν τοΐς έργοις τού νόμου. 2. ό κύριος τού ούρα- νοΰ έχει τα δώρα τοΐς δούλοις. 3· <*πό τού νόμου καί από τών αποστόλων. τοΐς όφθαλμοΐς βλέπομεν τον οίνον έν τφ ποτηρίω. 5· παιδίον γινώσκει τον αδελφόν. II. ι. In the world and in the temple. 2. From the temple and from heaven. 3. The apostles receive bread for the servants. 4. We know the law and believe. 5. The son wishes to speak to the children. LESSON IX Present Indicative Middle 51. The Greek verb has three voices: active, mid¬ dle, and passive. The active and passive voices are used as in English; the active voice represents the subject as acting; the passive voice represents the subject as acted upon. 52. The middle voice represents the subject as acting with reference to himself. Thus: 1. As PRESENT INDICATIVE MIDDLE 37 acting directly on himself (direct middle): λούω, I wash; λούομαι, I wash myself. 2. As acting for himself or for his own interest in some way: αγοράζω, I huy; αγοράζομαι, I buy for myself. o>. Precisely how the subject acts with reference to himself, the middle voice per se does not tell. This precise relation is determined by the meaning of the verb itself and the context, b. Often it is impossible to translate the shade of meaning given by the middle. Yet in some verbs there is a bold change in meaning. 63. The conjugation of the present indicative mid¬ dle of λούω, I wash , is Singular Plural 1. λού-ο-μαι, I wash myself λου-6-μεθα, we wash our¬ selves 2. λού-η, you wash your- λού-ε-σθε, ye wash your¬ self selves 3. λού-ε-ται, he washes him- λού-ο-νται, they wash self themselves Present infinitive middle λού-ε-σθαι, to wash oneself. Observe that the appended translation is the direct middle. If άγοράζομαι I buy for myself , etc., were given, the indirect middle would be seen. 64. The primary middle personal endings are: Singular 1. -μαι, I 2. -σαι, thou (you) 3. -ται, he, she, it Plural -μέθα, we -σθε, ye -νται, they 38 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR The thematic vowel (%) and personal endings: 1. -ομαι -ομεθα 2. -εσαι -εσθε 3· -εται -ονται Observe in the conjugation of λούω that: 1. The second person sing, λούη is for λούεσαι, -η arose from the dropping of σ and the contraction of ε and αι = ηι = γ). Rarely is ει found instead of T)· 2. at in these personal endings is considered short, hence the accent on the antepenult. The same principle of accent is to be observed as in II and 13. 3. The thematic vowel (%) is found as in the active voice. 4. The present middle infinitive ending is -σθαι. The αι is considered short. 55. Vocabulary αγοράζω, I buy άγοράζομαι, I buy for myself άττω. I fasten to άπτομαι, I fasten myself to , touch λούω. I wash λούομαι, I wash myself νίπτω, I wash νίπτομαι, I wash myself παύω, I stop παύομαι. I stop myself , cease φυλάσσω I guard , keep φυλάσσομαι, I guard myself , keep myself This vocabulary is given as a simple illustration of the middle. Any verb may be used in the middle voice. PRESENT INDICATIVE PASSIVE 39 56. Exercises I. I. αγοράζεται, φυλάσση, παύομαι. 2. νίπτομαι τό πρόσωπον. 3· φυλάσσεται άπό τού κόσμου. 4· ° δούλος άγοράζεται τό πλοΐον. 5· άπτόμεθα καί λουόμεθα. 6. παύεσθε καί λέγουσι. II. ι. He ceases, they wash themselves. 2. You buy bread for yourself. 3. The apostle washes his (the) face. 4. The child guards himself from the man. LESSON X Present Indicative Passive 57. Vocabulary βάλλω, I throw κρίνω, I judge διδάσκω, I teach στέλλω, I send έγείρω, I raise up σώζω, I save κηρύσσω,/ announce , proclaim είς, prep., into , used with the accusative only, υπό, prep., used with the ablative (see 86), by; with the accusative, under. 58. The passive voice is later than the active and middle and did not develop distinctive personal endings. The middle and passive are the same in form, except in the future and aorist. For the mean¬ ing of passive see 51. 59. The following is the present indicative passive of λύω I loose. 40 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR Singular 1. λύ-ο-μαι, I am (being) loosed 2. λυ-fl, you are (be¬ ing) loosed 3. λύ-ε-ται, he is (being) loosed Plural λυ-ό-μεθα, we are (being) loosed λύ-ε-σθε, ye are (being) loosed λύ-ο-νται they are (being) loosed Present passive infinitive λύ-ε-σθαι, to be loosed. 60. It is to be observed that the present passive voice uses the present middle endings. The present middle and passive voices have the same form. 61. Generally the context will make clear whether the middle or passive voice is meant. 62. Exercises I. I. βλέπονται, πέμπεται, ακούεις, άκούη. 2. σώζει, σωζόμεθα, κρίνομαι, άγεται. 3· διδάσκω, διδάσκονται, βάλ¬ λει, βάλλεται, φ έγειρεσθε από τών νεκρών.1 5· δ λόγος διδάσκεται έν τώ ίερφ. 6. οι δούλοι στέλλονται είς τον οίκον. 7· γράφεται έν τω νόμω. 8. πιστεύουσι είς τδν κύριον καί σώζονται. 9· κρινόμεθα υπό τού κυρίου. II. ι. He sends and is sent. 2. He believes and is saved. 3. The word is proclaimed in the temple. 4. The son of man is judged. 5. The stone is thrown into the house. 6. The bread is taken from the apostle. 7. You are judged by the son of man. 1 νεκρός, dead. IMPERFECT INDICATIVE ACTIVE 41 LESSON XI Imperfect Indicative Active 63. Vocabulary αίρω, I take up , bear βαχτίζω, I baptize έσθίω, I eat κράζω, I cry out μέλλω, I am about (or go¬ ing) to do some¬ thing μένω, I remain 64. The imperfect tense is made on the present stem. Thus pres, λέγ-ω; imp. έ-λεγ-ον. 65. The imperfect indicative represents an action as going on in past time ( durative or linear action in past time), — this action may be simultaneous, prolonged, descriptive, repeated, customary, inter¬ rupted, attempted, or begun, according to the con¬ text and the meaning of the verb itself. 66. The personal endings of the secondary 1 active tenses are : Singular Plural 1. -v -μεν 2. -ς -τε 3. none -v or -σαν. 67. The imperfect indicative active of λούω, I wash: Singular 1. ε-λου-ο-ν, I was wash¬ ing 2. ε-λου-ε-ς, you were washing 3. έ-λο υ-ε, he was wash¬ ing Plural έ-λού-ο-μεν, we were wash¬ ing έ-λού-ε-τε, ye were wash¬ ing ε-λο u-o-v, they were washing 1 See 1 7, footnote 1. 42 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR a. In the third pers. plu. the form έ-λου-ο-σαν is sometimes found. b. In the plural forms like έλουαμεν, έλούατε, έλουαν sporadically appear. 68. Observe that: I. The thematic vowel is °/€ as in the present indicative. 2. The third person sing, has no personal ending. 3. Before the stem λου- is ε. This ε is called the augment. 69. The augment is probably an old adverb for “then.” The augment in the imperfect places linear action in past time. At times it is difficult to trans¬ late this Greek tense into English, because of the absence of a true imperfect in English. 70. The indicative of the secondary (or historical) tenses, besides having different personal endings, has also an augment. This augment is of two forms: 1. If the stem begins with a consonant, the vowel ε is commonly prefixed — called syllabic augment. 2. But if the stem begins with a vowel, that vowel is lengthened — called temporal augment. Thus: a becomes η (a becomes η) ε becomes η (at becomes η) [except in 2 Ti. 1:16, 0 becomes ω (au becomes ηυ) where it remains at] t becomes i u becomes ϋ ει may become η, but remains et in New Testament, ευ may become ηυ, but usually remains ευ in New Testament. ot generally becomes ω, but sometimes remains ot in New Testament. E.g., αγω, lead ; ήγον, I was leading; ακούω, hear ; PREPOSITIONS 43 ι^κουον, I was hearing ; έγείρω, raise up; ήγειρον, I was raising up; at ρω, take up; fj pov, I was taking up. θέλω has η in the imperfect, ηθελον. Sometimes μέλλω has η, thus η μέλλον. 71. Exercises I. I. έμένετε, έκραζε, έβαλλες. 2. ηυρίσκομεν, έχίστευον, ηκουε. 3· εμενον έν τφ ο’ίκιρ. τδ τέκνον έβαλλε λίθους. 5· δ κύριος έσωζε τους άνθρώχους. 6. οί ά^όστολοι έκήρυσσον τον λόγον. II. I. You were saying. 2. They were eating the bread. 3. The teacher was sending garments for the children. 4. He was taking up the child from the boat. 5. The men were leading the servants into the house. LESSON XII Prepositions ♦ 72. Vocabulary αχό, prep., from, off, away from, used with the ablative only. είς, prep., into, used with the accusative only, έκ (έξ), prep., out, out of, from within, used with the ablative only, έξ before words beginning with a vowel. έν, prep., in, used with the locative only. The re¬ sultant meaning of έν and the locative is some¬ times instrumental. χαρά, prep., beside, used with the locative, ablative, and accusative. 44 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR συν, prep., with , used with the instrumental only. άχοστέλλω, send forth εισάγω, bring in έκβάλλω, throw out , cast out χαραλαμβάνω, take , receive συνάγω, gather together Some prepositions do not have an accent. Words which do not have an accent are called proclitics and are to be pronounced with the following words. 73. Prepositions are adverbs specialized to define more clearly the meanings of cases, many of which come to be used in composition with verbs. Prepositions were originally free adverbs. These adverbs were brought gradually into closer relation with nouns, and many of them into a closer connec- » tion with verbs. 74. Prepositions are used to bring out more clearly the idea of case. They help the cases; the case calls in the preposition to aid in expressing more sharply the meaning of the case. “It is the case which indicates the meaning of the preposition, and not the preposition which gives the meaning to the case.” Then, strictly speaking, prepositions (in Greek) do not “govern” cases. Take χαρά, meaning beside , for example: with locative, χαρά τώ δούλφ, by or at the side of the servant; with the ablative, χαρά τοϋ δούλου, from the side of the servant; with the accusative, χαρά τδν δοΰλον, along side of the servant. a. The cases used with prepositions are the abla¬ tive, genitive, locative, instrumental, and accusative. PREPOSITIONS 45 b. The dative is not used with any of the preposi¬ tions in the New Testament, except probably έγγυς (Acts 1x138) and έχ£. 75. In composition with verbs the preposition has commonly two uses. 1. The preposition is merely local: e.g., έκ-βάλλω, I throw out, cast out; καταβαίνω, I am going down. 2. The preposition intensifies or completes the idea of the verb: e.g., έσθίω, I eat; κατεσθίω, I eat up {down). This is called the “ perfective ’ ’ force of the preposition. a. Sometimes prepositions change the meaning of the verb and blend with it. 76. When a preposition ends in a vowel, as αχό, χαρά, the final vowel is dropped before a verb that begins with a vowel: e.g., χαρέχω is for xapa + εχω, I pro¬ vide, supply. When compound verbs receive the augment, the final vowel of the preposition is dropped: e.g., χαραλαμβάνω, I receive; χαρελάμβανον, I was receiving; άχοστέλλω, I send forth, άχέστελλον, I was sending forth; κατάγω, κατήγον. a. The prepositions χερί and χρό do not drop their final vowel; e.g., χροάγο^, I go before; χεριάγω, I go about. 77. Exercises I, I. οι άχόστολοι εμενον έν τφ ο’ίκω. 2. δ κύριος άχέστελλε τους υιούς είς τον κόσμον. 3· δ θεός έγείρει τούς νεκρούς έκ θανάτου. χαρελαμβάνο μεν τον λόγον τοΰ Θεοΰ άχό τοΟ κυρίου. 5· δ άνθρωχος χέμχεται χαρά τηύ θεού. 6. οι δούλοι εμενον σύν τοϊς άνθρώχοις. 46 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR II. i. He was sending the child out of the boat. 2. The child was throwing stones into the house. 3. The servants were eating up the bread. 4. The Lord was sending forth the apostles. 5. The teacher is about to receive the bread from the child. LESSON XIII The Imperfect Indicative Middle and Passive 78. Vocabulary άναβλέπω, I look up, re- δοξάζω, I glorify cover sight πείθω, I persuade άπέχω, I keep off , have φέ ρω, / hear , carry in full (of re¬ ceipts) ; Midd. I keep myself from, abstain, άτο θνήσκω, I die άνά, prep., on, upon , along; used with accusative only in New Testa¬ ment. διώκω, I follow after, pursue, persecute 79. The personal endings in the secondary 1 tenses of the indicative middle and passive are: Singular 1. -μην, I 2. -σο, thou {you) 3. -το, he, etc. Plural -μέθα, we -σθε, ye {you) -ντο, they 1 The terms “primary” and “secondary” apply to the indicative mode only. / IMPF. IND. MIDD. AND PASS. 47 80. The conjugation of λύω in the imperfect indicative middle is: Singular Plural 1. 2. 3- έλυόμην, I was loosing έλυόμεθα, we were loosing {for) myself {for) ourselves έλυου, you were loos- έλ υεσθε. ye were loosing ing {for) {for) yourselves yourself έλύετο, he was loosing έλυοντο, they were loos¬ {for) himself ing {for) them- selves a. In the second pers. sing., έλύου, -ου is for -εσο; intersonantic σ drops out and εο contract to ου. 81. Observe: I. The thematic vowel °/ε. 2. The augment. 3. The accent in first pers. sing. 82. As in the present tense, so also in the imperfect, the middle and passive voices are alike in form. 83. The conjugation of λυω in the imperfect indica¬ tive passive is: Singular 1. έλυόμην, I was being loosed 2. έλυου, you were be¬ ing loosed 3. έλυετο, he was being loosed Plural έλυόμεθα, we were being loosed έλυεσθε, you were being loosed έλυοντο, they were being loosed 84. Review the present indicative active (13), mid¬ dle (53), and passive (59), and the imperfect indica¬ tive active (67). 48 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR 85. The personal endings of the verb have to express 1. The person of the verb. 2. The number of the verb. 3. The voice of the verb. In fact they express everything that has to do with the subject. 4. In the indicative they tell whether primary or secondary. The personal endings of the verb must be mastered. The importance of the forms of the verb cannot be overstressed. If the verb-forms thus far given are thoroughly learned, the student has overcome the greater part of the difficulty in the regular verb. 86. 6x0 (prep.) is used with the ablative case to denote the agent , by, especially with the passive voice; e.g., έβαχτίζοντο υχδ Ίωάνου, they were being baptized by John. 87. Exercises I. I. έχαυόμην, έλούετο, φυλάσσεται. 2. οι άχόστολοι άχείχοντο1 άχδ τού κόσμου. 3· τΦ έδοξάζετο δ κύριος. \. τδ τέκνον ήγετο υχδ τού άνθρώχου. 5· έσώζου κα I άνέβλεχες. f II. 1.. The word was being preached by the apostles. 2. The children were washing themselves. 3. I was being judged by men. 4. The angel of the Lord was being heard. 5. The law was being taught in the temple. 6. The servants were looking up into the heavens. 1 The augment in the imperfect of εχω is είχον, for έεχον is έσεχον. THE FIRST DECLENSION 49 LESSON XIV The First Declension or Declension of a- Stems Vocabulary 88. αρχή, beginning γραφή, writing, scripture έντολή, commandment ζωή, life φωνή, voice ψυχή, soul άγάχη, love διαθήκη, covenant , testa¬ ment δικαιοσύνη, righteousness ειρήνη, peace κώμη, village 89. All substantives of the first declension whose nominatives end in a or η are feminine in gender. 90. The feminine article (ή) and nominatives in -η are declined as follows: φωνή, voice κώμη, village Stem < ρωνα- Stem κωμα- Singular Plural Singular Plural Nom. ή φωνή αι φωναί κώμη κώμαι Gen. τής φωνής των φωνών κώμης κωμών Abl. τής φωνής των φωνών κώμης κωμών Loc. τή φωνή ταΐς φωναΐς κώμη κώμαις Ins. τή φωνή ταϊς φωναΐς κώμη κώμαις Dat. τή φωνή ταΐς φωναΐς κώμη κώμαις Acc. την φωνήν τάς φωνάς κώμην κώμας Voc. φωνή φωναί κώμη κώμαι 91. Observe: i. The stem ends in a, and is therefore called the a-declension. 2. Iota-subscript is always written in the loc., ins., and dat. singular (see 25 a). 50 BEGINNER'S GREEK GRAMMAR 3. When the nominative sing, ends in -η the η is retained throughout the singular. 4. In the nomina¬ tive plural -at is considered short in determining place and kind of accent. 92. The ending -αις in the loc., ins., and dat. plural is a new formation on the analogy of -οις in o-stems. See 25 c. 93. Nouns that have an acute accent on the last syllable (ultima) are called oxytones (sharp tones) ; e.g., φωνή, ζωή. Learn that all oxytones of the first and second declension have the circumflex accent over the ultima in all the genitives, ablatives, loca¬ tives, instrumentals, and datives, See 40. 94. The gen. and abl. plu. of substantives of the first or a- declension always have the circumflex accent on the ultima, no matter where the accent is in the nominative singular, since -ών is contracted from -έων derived from -άων. Thus κώμη, but κωμών. 95. Compare the feminine article (ή) with the endings of φωνή. Notice that, as in the case of the forms δ and 01 of the masculine article, the forms ή and al do not have an accent. These forms of the article are called proclitic : they are to be pronounced as a part of the following word. 96. Exercises I. I. al ψυχαί των ανθρώπων σώζονται. 2. έν αρχή 6 λόγος ήκούετο. 3· ή Εντολή τής ζωής Ιλέγετο υπό του κυρίου. 4· αι 7ΡαΦ°^ έδιδάσκοντο iv τω ιερώ. 5· ^ξεβάλ- λοντο έκ των κωμών. 6. ή διαθήκη έγράφετο τοΐς άνθρώποις. THE FIRST DECLENSION 51 II. i. From the beginning, in the village. 2. He is teaching the scriptures. 3. We have peace in the soul. 4. The sons were receiving the testament. 5. The apostles heard the commandment from the Lord. 6. The soul is being saved and finds peace and righteousness. LESSON XV First Declension (Continued) 97. Vocabulary αμαρτία, ή, sin καρδία, ή, heart βασιλεία, ή, kingdom σοφία, ή, wisdom έκκλησία, ή, assembly , ( church ) αλήθεια, ή, truth έξουσία, ή, authority , power ασθένεια, ή, weakness ήμερα, ή, day μάχαιρα, ή, sword 98. ι. As we have seen, a substantive in Greek has case , number , and gender. 2. There are three genders: masculine , feminine and neuter. 99. Nearly all substantives of the second declen¬ sion with nominatives in -ος are masculine;1 and all substantives of the second declension with nomina¬ tives in -ov are neuter. 100. All substantives of the first declension with nominatives in -η or -a are feminine. Those with 1 δδός, way, road , and έρημος, wilderness, desert, are feminine in gender. / 52 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR nominatives in -ης or -ας are masculine. See Lesson XVI. But the gender of substantives must often be learned by observation. Hereafter in this book the gender will be indicated in the vocabulary by the article placed after the substantive. (This method is used by most lexicons.) The masculine article, o, indicates masculine gender; the feminine article, ή, feminine gender; the neuter article, τό, neuter gender. 101. Substantives of the first declension with nom¬ inatives in -a (preceded by ε, t, or p) are declined as follows : καρδία. , heart αλήθεια, truth Stem καρδια- Stem άληθεια- Singular Plural Singular Plural Nom. καρδία καρδίαι αλήθεια άλήθειαι Gen. καρδίας καρδιών αλήθειας αληθειών Abl. καρδίας καρδιών αλήθειας αληθειών Loc. καρδία καρδίαις αληθείς άληθείαις Ins. καρδία καρδίαις άληθεία άληθείαις Dat. καρδίςι καρδίαις άληθείοι άληθείαις Ace. καρδίαν καρδίας αλήθειαν άληθείας Voc. καρδία καρδίαι αλήθεια άλήθειαι 102. Observe: I. When ε, i, or p precedes -a in the nominative singular, the a is retained throughout the singular.1 2. The -a after ε, t,· or p may be long as in καρδία or short as in αλήθεια. 3 When the -a is short (in the first declension) in the nominative singular, 1 Sometimes -ης is found in the gen. and abl. sing, after ε, t, or p. THE FIRST DECLENSION 53 it is also short in the accusative singular. But in the accusative plural the -a is long in the first declension. 4. In the gen., abl., loc., ins., and dat. singular of αλήθεια the accent is brought forward to the penult because the ultima is long. Cf. 33, 2, and 26, 1. 103. Exercises I. I. ή βασιλεία τού θεού. 2. ή έκκλησία εχει έξουσίαν. 3· ή δικαιοσύνη και ή αλήθεια έν τώ κόσμφ εμενον. 4· ° διδάσκαλος εχει την μάχαιραν τής αλήθειας. 5· εβλεπον τήν ημέραν τού κυρίου καί έδόξαζον τον θεόν. II. ι. In the hearts of men. 2. Wisdom was being taught in the church. 3. It is being written in truth. 4. The sword of truth pursues sin. 5. The Lord has power to save men. LESSON XVI First Declension (Continued) 104. Vocabulary γλώσσα, ή, tongue κεφαλή, ή, head δόξα, ή, glory οίκία, ή, house θάλασσα, ή, sea παραβολή, ή, parable μαθητής, δ, disciple συναγωγή, ή, synagogue προφήτης, δ, prophet χαρά, ή, joy έπαγγελία, ή, promise ώρα, ή, hour 54 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR 105. Substantives of the first declension with nom¬ inatives in -a, not after ε, i, or p, are declined as follows : STEM γλωσσα- Singular Plural Nom. γλώσσα γλώσσαι Gen. γλώσσης γλωσσών Abl. γλώσσης γλωσσών Loc. γλώσση γλώσσαις Ins. γλώσση γλώσσαις Dat. γλώσση γλώσσαις Ace. γλώσσαν γλώσσας Voc. γλώσσα γλώσσαι 106. Observe: I. When ε, t, or p does not precede a of the nom. sing., the a is changed to η in the gen., abl., loc., ins., and dat. sing. 2. When the a is short in the nom. sing, it is also short in the ace. sing. 107. Contract substantives of the first declension as γή, ή, earth , and μνά, ή, mina (a weight and sum of money) are declined like φωνή and καρδία respec¬ tively, except that they have the circumflex accent on the ultima throughout. 108. Substantives of the first declension with nom. sing, in -ης or -ας are masculine in gender. See ioo. 109. The declension of προφήτης, δ, prophet , is \ THE FIRST DECLENSION 55 STEM χροφητα- Singular Plural Nom. χροφήτης χροφήται Gen. χροφήτου χροφητών Abl. χροφήτου χροφητών Loc. χροφήτη χροφήταις Ins. χροφήτη χροφήταις Dat. χροφήτη χροφήταις Ace. χροφήτην χροφήτας Voc. χροφήτα χροφήται 110. Observe: 1. The gen. and abl. sing, -ου same as in the o- declension. 2. The voc. sing, is -a. Masculine substantives of the first declension in -της have -a in the vocative sing. 3. The plurals of all substantives of the a- declension are alike. 111. The singular of νεανίας, δ, youth, is Nom. νεανίας, Gen. νεανίου, Abl. νεανίου, Loc. νεανία, Ins. νεανία, Dat. νεανίςι, Ace. νεανίαν, Voc. νεανία. 112. Exercises I. I. εχετε χαράν καί είρήνην έν ταΐς καρδίαις. 2. οί μαθηταί ε'λεγον χαραβολάς έν τη συναγωγή. 3· εν τή γή καί έν τή θαλάσση έδοξάζετο δ κύριος. άχδ τής αρχής ήκούομεν τούς χροφήτας. 5· λαμβάνετε τάς έχαγγελίας άχδ τοΰ κυρίου» 6. ήγον τον νεανίαν έκ τής οικίας. II. ι. They were remaining in the house. 2. Righteousness and love remain in the world. 3. The hour of the Lord is announced. 4. The prophets are teaching the disciples in parables. 5. The promises were spoken from the beginnings 56 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR LESSON XVII Adjectives of the First and Second Declension 113. Vocabulary αγαθός, good καλός, good , beautiful αγαπητός, beloved πιστός, faithful έσχατος, last πρώτος, first κακός,, evil , bad 114. Most adjectives of the vowel (first and second) declension have three endings, -ος (masc.), -η or -a (fem.), -ov (neut.). Adjectives are declined in gender , number and case. 115. The adjective αγαθός is declined as follows: Singidar Plural Masc. Fem. Neut. Masc. Fem. Neut. Nom. αγαθός αγαθή αγαθόν αγαθοί άγαθαί αγαθά Gen. αγαθού αγαθής αγαθού αγαθών αγαθών αγαθών, Abl. αγαθού αγαθής αγαθού αγαθών αγαθών αγαθών Loc. άγαθώ αγαθή άγαθώ άγαθοΐς άγαθαΐς άγαθοΐς Ins. άγαθώ άγαθή άγαθζο άγαθοΐς άγαθαΐς άγαθοΐς Dat. άγαθώ άγαθή άγαθώ άγαθοΐς άγαθαΐς άγαθοΐς Acc. άγαθόν άγαθήν άγαθόν άγαθούς άγαθάς άγαθά Voc. άγαθέ άγαθή άγαθόν άγαθοί άγαθαί άγαθά. 116. Observe: ι. In form the masc. is declined exactly like a masculine substantive of the second declension (see ουρανός, 39); the neuter like a neuter substantive of the second declension (see εργον, 42); and the feminine like a feminine substantive in -η (see φωνή, 9θ). ADJECTIVE OF THE VOWEL DECLENSIONS 57 a. The accent of the feminine genitive and abla¬ tive plural does not follow the accent of the feminine substantive of the a- declension (given in 94), but the regular accent of the masculine: thus the geni¬ tive and ablative plural feminine form of έσχατος is εσχάτων. 117. Adjectives agree with the substantives which they modify, in gender, number, and case; e.g., τού χιστού δούλου; τη τυ ρώτγ) ήμερα; καλή δδώ. Cf. 36· ν 118. Adjectives are used to refer to substantives in two ways, either (1) as an attribute or (2) as a predicate. 1. In the phrase δ χιστδς δούλος, the faithful servant , τιστός, faithful, is an attribute adjective; it qualifies the substantive, δούλος, servant , to describe, without any assertion about it. 2. In the phrase δ δούλος χιστός, the servant (is) faithful , the predicate adjective χιστός, faithful, makes an assertion about the substantive δούλος, servant. It is important to understand this distinction between the attribute and the predicate adjective in Greek. The distinction lies in just this, that the predicate presents an additional statement, while the attribute is an adherent description. 119. Examples of the positions of the adjective: 1. Attributive position of the adjective — δ’χοστδς δούλος Ί . , r = the taithtul servant. ο δούλος ο χιστος] Note that the adjective comes immediately after the article. 58 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR There is another order of the attributive position, δούλος δ πιστός. It is not frequent in the New Testament. 2. Predicate position of the adjective — ό δούλος πιστός πιστός ό δούλος = the servant (is) faithful Note that the adjective does not come immediately after the article but either precedes the article or follows the substantive. 120. When the article is not present, the context must decide whether an adjective is attributive or predicate; e.g., the phrase πιστός δούλος (or δούλος πιστός) may be either attributive, a faithful servant , or predicate, a servant (is) faithful. 121. In the New Testament όλος, whole , never has the attributive position. 122. Exercises I. I. ή πρώτη ώρα. 2. οι μαθηταί οι αγαπητό? έδίδασκον τόν καλόν λόγον. 3· τέκνον τό αγαπητόν ευρίσκει την κακήν όδόν. 4· τα^ εσχάταις ήμέραις προφήται ήκοόοντο. 5· ό αγαθός λόγος έκηρύσσετο έν όλω τώ κόσμω. II. ι. The evil prophet was not 1 proclaiming the good promises. 2. On the last day the disciple was speaking in the synagogue. 3. The whole house was receiving the word of God. 4. In the first hour of the day they were glorifying the Lord. 1 See 130. ADJECTIVES OF THE VOWEL DECLENSIONS 59 LESSON XVIII Adjectives of the First and Second Declension (Continued) Vocabulary 123. αιώνιος, eternal δίκαιος, righteous έτερος, another μόνος, only , alone μικρός, small , little πονηρός, evil ’ίδιος, one s own 124. Learn the declension of ’ίδιος, one's own , and μικρός, small , in § B 13. Observe: 1. When e, t, or p precedes the final vowel of the stem, the feminine has -a in the nomi¬ native sing. 2. In the nom. and gen. plur. fern, the accent follows the masc. 125. Some adjectives (especially compounds) have only two endings, the masc. and fern, having the same form: e.g., άδικος, -ον, unjust , unrighteous . 126. Prepositional phrases or adverbs are often used like adjectives in the attributive position: e.g., οι έν τω ο’ίκω άνθρωποι, the men in the house. The substantive may be absent: e.g., τά Iv τοΐς ούρανοΤς, the things in the heavens. 127. The adjective in any gender without a sub¬ stantive is often used as a practical substantive, usually with the article, but not always: e.g., οί καλοί, the good (men or people) ; τό αγαθόν, the good thing; τη τρίτη, on the third (day), — the feminines are usually examples of ellipsis of ήμερα, οδός, etc. 60 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR 128. As a complement, the infinitive (mostly in the active voice) is used with adjectives, substantives, and verbs that imply power or ability, fitness, capacity, etc. (and their opposites): e.g., δυνατός κωλύειν, able to hinder; έξουσία έκβάλλειν, power to cast out; δύναμαι άκούειν, I am able to hear. 129. Exercises I. I. οί καλοί μόνοι σώζονται. 2. οι έν τφ ο’ίκφ ησθιον τόν άρτον. 3· τ7} πρώτη εκρινε τούς κακούς, φ ® υιός του ανθρώπου εχει εξουσίαν σώζειν. 5· °'1 δούλοι ελεγον κακά. II. I. On the first day he was preaching in the synagogue. 2. The first, last ; the last, first. 3. The faithful are saved. 4. He has power to cast out the evil. 5. The men in the boat know the sea. LESSON XIX Personal Pronouns and είμί, I am 130. Vocabulary άλλα, adversative conj., but έγώ, I γάρ, co-ordinating conj., for είμί, I am γέ, enclitic postpositive particle σύ, thou (you) giving special prominence to a word, indeed, at least δέ, copulative and adversative (milder than άλλά) conj., in the next place , and; but , on the other hand. ou ούκ ούχ , not PERSONAL PRONOUNS 61 a. Words that cannot come first in a sentence are called postpositives, γάρ, γέ, and δέ are postposi¬ tives. b. o u is written before consonants ; oux, before vowels; ούχ before the rough breathing. 131. Generally speaking, the pronoun is a word that stands in place of a substantive. The idea that is set forth by a pronoun is the relation of a subject or object to the speaker. The reason for the use of the pronoun, then, is to avoid the repetition of the substantive. 132. The declension of the first personal pronoun έγώ, J, is Singular Plural Nom. έγώ, I ημείς, we Gen. έμοΰ, μου, of me ημών, of US Abl. έμοΰ, μου etc. ήμών, etc. Loc. έμοί, μοι ήμΐν Ins. έμοί, μοι ήμΐν Dat. έμοί, μοι ήμΐν Acc. έμέ, με ημάς 133. The declension of the second personal pronoun, σύ, thou , is Singular Plural Nom. συ, thou υμείς, ye (you) Gen. σου, σου, of thee υμών, of you Abl. σου, σου etc. υμών etc. Loc. σοί, σοι, υμίν Ins. σοί, σοί υμΤν Dat. σοί, σοι υμϊν Acc. σέ, σε. υμάς 62 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR 134. Observe: In the singular of the first and second personal pronouns there are, except in the nomina¬ tive, two forms for each case, an accented form and an unaccented form (which in the first person is also shorter than the accented form). These forms are called enclitics (see 138). 135. 1. Commonly the accented or emphatic forms are used when emphasis or contrast is desired. Yet it is not certain that all emphasis is absent when the unaccented or enclitic forms are used. 2. With prepositions the emphatic or accented forms are used generally, except with χρός, which ordinarily has χρός με. 3. In general the personal pronouns were not used in the nominative case unless emphasis or contrast was desired: e.g., τον άγγελον εβλεχον έγώ, I was looking at the angel (It was I who was looking at the angel). This follows from the fact that the verb uses the personal pronouns as personal endings (as explained in 17), and no need was felt for the separate expression of the personal pronoun in the nominative. 136. The conjugation of the present indicative of είμί, I am , is as follows: Plural Singular 1. ε(μ(, I am 2. εΐ, thou art 3. έστί, he, she, or it is έσμέν, we are έστέ, ye (you) are εΐσί, they are Present infinitive είναι, to he a. είμί is for έσ-μι; εΐ is for έσσι; είσι is for (σ)εντι for (h) εντι; είναι is probably for έσ-ναι. h. All VERB TO BE. ENCLITICS 63 the forms of the present indicative of ε(μ(, except εΐ, are enclitic (see 138). c. It was noted in 18 that the primary act. end. -μι was dropped, and the pre¬ ceding 0 lengthened to ω. Some verbs retain this -μι and do not have the thematic %. The former make up what is called the ω- conjugation, the latter the μι- conjugation. To the latter belongs ε£μ£. 137. When the verb είμί is used merely as a con¬ nective or copula, it has the predicate nominative: e.g., 6 μαθητής έστιν άνθρωπος, the disciple is a man ; see examples below under 138, 1-5. Note that the subject may be known from the predicate whenever the subject has the article and the predicate does not: e.g., αγάπη έστιν δ θεός, God is love. Here άγάπη is the predicate because it does not have the article, while θεός does have the article. 138. Enclitics are words attaching themselves so closely to the preceding word as to be pronounced with it. Usually they have no accents of their own. The word before an enclitic is treated as follows : 1. If the preceding word has an acute accent on the antepenult, it receives an additional accent (acute) on its ultima from any enclitic, whether of one syllable (monosyllabic) or of two syllables (dis¬ syllabic) : 6 διδάσκαλός μου, my teacher δ διδάσκαλός έστιν άγαθός, the teacher is good 2. If the preceding word has an acute accent on the penult, its accent is not affected in any way: 61 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR then a monosyllabic enclitic loses its accent; but a dissyllabic enclitic retains its accent: b λόγος μου, my word ; ή καρδία -σου, thy heart ό λόγος έστίν αΙώνιος, the word is eternal 3. If the preceding word naturally has an acute accent on the ultima, it keeps its own accent, and any enclitic loses its accent. I ό αδελφός σου, thy brother ο! αδελφοί είσι πιστοί, the brothers are faithful 4. If the preceding word has a circumflex accent on the penult, it receives an additional accent (acute) on its ultima from any enclitic : ό δούλος μου, my servant ό δούλος έστι δίκαιος, the servant is just 5. If the preceding word has a circumflex accent on the ultima, its accent is not affected in any way, and any enclitic loses its accent: ό υιός τού αδελφού μου, the son of my brother οι δούλοι τού θεού έσμεν, we are the servants of God 139. Observe: 1. A monosyllabic enclitic regularly loses its accent. 2. A dissyllabic enclitic retains its accent only under the condition named in 2 above. 140. An enclitic sometimes retains its accent: 1 . When there is emphasis on the enclitic or when the enclitic begins a sentence. 2. έστί is written εστι at the beginning of a sen¬ tence, when it means exist or is possible , and when it immediately follows άλλ’ (αλλά), εί, καί, μή, ούκ, 8τι, τούτ’ (τούτο), ώς. PERSONAL PRONOUNS 65 141. A proclitic (see note to 72 and 95) or an enclitic followed by an enclitic receives an acute accent: e.g. δ γε δούλάς μου έστι. ΟΝ υ κτ β rA η . (But under 138-140 modern critics and editors differ.) 142. Exercises I. I. υμείς έστε τα τέκνα τού θεού. 2. ήμείς γάρ γινώσκομεν τον κύριον. 3· ή δέ αλήθεια ούκ εστιν1 έν ήμΐν. 4· ή καί ή αλήθεια καί ή ζωή. 5· τούτο2 έστι τό εργον τού θεού. 6. άλλα ού λόγοις υμείς σώζεσθε. II. ι. My house is in the village. 2. We are the servants of the Lord. 3. The way is bad, but you know me. 4. You are a prophet, for from you are sent forth words of wisdom. 5. We have bread for you (sing.). 6. You are my disciples. LESSON XX Third Personal Pronoun. Imperfect Ind. of ε(μ( 143. Vocabulary άλλος, -η, -0, other εί, conj., if αυτός, -ή, -0, self, very , same; όλος,-η,-ον, whole he , she , it ότι, conj., because , that σκοτία, ή, darkness 1 Certain words, i.e. words ending in -σι, the third personal sing, of past tenses (in-ε), and έστί, may add v. This is called movable v. Movable v in the older Greek was written when it would be followed by a word beginning with a vowel ; but later it was written before consonants and vowels. 2 τούτο, this (neuter). 66 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR 144. The declension of αυτός is as follows: Singular Masc. Fern. Neut. Nom. αυτός αυτή αυτό Gen. αυτού αυτής αυτού Abl. αυτού αυτής αυτού Loc. αύτώ αυτή αυτω Ins. αύτώ αυτή αύτώ Dat. αΰτώ ι αυτή αυτω Ace. αυτόν αυτήν αυτό Plural Nom. αυτοί αύταί αυτά Gen. αυτών αυτών αυτών Abl. αυτών αυτών αυτών Loc. αύτοίς αύταίς αύτοίς Ins. αύτοίς αύταίς αυτοίς Dat. αύτοίς αύταΐς αύτοίς Acc. αυτούς αύτάς αύτά erve that αυτός is declined like αγαθός (U5) ; that αυτός has no vocative and the neuter nom. and ace. sing, have no -v. 145. Meaning and uses of αυτός. It is properly a demonstrative. I. As an intensive pronoun αυτός means self; himself , herself , itself , etc. ; and is in the predicate position (i 19, 2) : αυτός δ ανθρωχος ό ανθρωχος αυτός • = the man himself 2. As an identical pronoun αυτός means same , and is in the attributive position (118, 1) : ό αυτός ανθρωχος, the same man THIRD PERSONAL PRONOUN 67 When the article precedes αυτός, the meaning is always the same. 3. When used alone in the genitive, ablative, locative, instrumental, dative, and accusative cases (the “oblique” cases), this word is the simple per¬ sonal pronoun of the third person : βλέχω αυτόν, I see him χέμχομεν αυτούς, we send them έν τφ οϊχφ αυτού, in his house (in the house of him) λαμβάνει τόν άρτον αχό αυτής, he takes the bread from her (With αυτός in the nominative, sometimes it is not clear whether we have simply an emphatic “he,” etc., or an intensive “self.”) 146. 1. The substantive to which a pronoun refers is called its antecedent: γινώσκομεν τόν διδάσκαλον και λέγομεν αυτώ, we know the teacher and speak to him. τόν διδάσκαλον is the antecedent of αυτώ 2. A pronoun agrees with its antecedent in gender and number. Cf. διδάσκαλον (masc. gender, sing, number) and αυτώ (masc. gender, sing, number). 147. 1. άλλος is declined (except the accent) like αυτός. Note -0 in the nom. and acc. neuter singular, άλλος is used alone and with the article (but in New Testament never in the senses of “the rest of”). 2. όλος always has the predicate position in the New Testament, όλος ό κόσμος, the whole world. 68 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR 148. The imperfect indicative of ειμί, I am , is Singular Plural 1. (ήν) and ή μην, I was ή μεν and η μέθα, we were 2. ής and ήσθα, thou wast ήτε, ye were 3· ήν, he was ή σαν, they were a. The middle form η μην has practically thrust out the active form ήν. b. ήσθα is an old perf. form, found twice in New Testament, c. ήμεθα is found nearly as often as ή μεν in New Testament. For the meaning of the imperfect indicative see 65. 149. Conditional Sentences. There are four separate forms for Greek condi¬ tions. The first is: The condition determined as fulfilled. Here any tense of the indicative is used, generally after εί, iff in the protasis (the if-clause). The apodosis (conclusion) generally has the indicative (any tense), but any mode may be used according to what is wanted, e.g. : εί σώζει τους ανθρώπους, τόν θεόν δοξάζει, if he is saving men , he is glorifying God. εί εσωζε τους ανθρώπους, τον θεόν έδόξαζε, if he was saving men , he was glorifying God. “The indicative states the condition as a fact. It may or may not be true in fact. The condition has nothing to do with that, but only with the state¬ ment.” The negative of the protasis is generally ού, not.2 1 Infrequently εάν, if , is used. 2 A few times μή, not, is found. DEFECTIVE VERBS 69 160. Exercises I. I. βλέπετε αυτόν. 2. αυτοί ημείς ούκ έκρινόμεθα, αλλά αυτόν έκρίνομεν. 3· δ αυτός μαθητής έλάμβανε τά τέκνα καί έδίδασκεν αυτά. 4· μενομεν έν αυτφ, ζωήν αιώνιον έχομεν. 5· λέγει 6 ’Ιησούς1 ότι οι δούλοι αυτού δοξάζουσι αυτόν. II ι. I glorify him. 2. Darkness is not in him. 3. He himself is the life. 4. On (έν) the same day he was teaching them. 5. If we receive him, he saves us. 6. We know the truth and proclaim it. 7. He has other servants in the world. 8. He was in the house. 9. They were faithful men. LESSON XXI Defective (“Deponent”) Verbs The Demonstrative Pronouns ουτος and έκεινος 161. Vocabulary απέρχομαι, αποκρίνομαι, βούλομαι, γίνομαι, διέρχομαι, δύναμαι, εισέρχομαι, I go away I answer I wish I become , be I go through I am able , can I enter έξέρχομαι, έρχομαι, πορεύομαι, προσέρχομαι έκεινος, -η, -ο, ουτος, αύτη, τούτο, I go out I go , come I go , proceed I go to, come to demons, pron., that (one) demons, pron. this (one) 1 Jesus. 70 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR διά, prep, (orginally “interval between”) with gen. through , by; with ace., because of , for the sake of, on account of. «τυρός, prep, (originally near, facing) with loc., near , by; with ace., towards, to; with abl. (once), “ from the point of view of. ” a. Note the many compound 1 verbs in the vocabu¬ lary, especially a preposition + έρχομαι. Many of these verbs occur hundreds of times in the New Testament, b. δύναμαι does not have a thematic vowel; a appears in all persons. In the second pers. sing, two forms are found: δύνασαι and δύνη. c. γίνομαι is used also as a copula (see 137). 152. Defective verbs. Some verbs were used in all the voices in all the tenses, as λύω; some verbs in some tenses were used only in one voice and in other tenses, in another voice, as βαίνω, I go (future βήσομαι) ; some verbs were used in one voice only, as κείμαι, I lie {am laid). The term defective is applied to those verbs which are used either in the middle voice or in the passive voice and not in the active voice but seemingly have a simple active meaning; as αισθάνομαι, I perceive, in middle voice; βούλομαι, I wish, in passive voice. The verbs in the vocabulary (151) are defective verbs. But some of these verbs have active forms in some tenses, as γίνομαι; second perfect active γέγονα. These verbs have been called “deponents” (mid¬ dle or passive) because it was difficult to see the dis¬ tinctive force of the voice. Yet it is not hard to 1 See 73-76. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS 71 recognize the personal interest of the subject in the verbs in the middle voice. 153. The declension of ουτος is: Singular Masc. Fem. Neut. Nom. ουτος αυτή τούτο Gen. τούτου ταύτης τούτου Abl. τούτου ταύτης τούτου Loc. τούτφ ταύτη τούτφ Ins. τούτφ ταύτη τούτφ Dat. τούτφ ταύτη τούτφ Acc. τούτον ταύτην τούτο Plural Masc. Fem. Neut. Nom. ουτοι αυται ταύτα Gen. τούτων τούτων τούτων Abl. τούτων τούτων τούτων Loc. τούτοις ταύταις τούτοις Ins. τούτους ταύταις τούτοις Dat. τούτοις ταύταις τούτοις Acc. τούτους ταύτας ταύτα 154. Observe: I. The rough breathing occurs in the nom. masc. and fern., sing, and plural, but all other forms begin with τ. 2. The diphthong of the penult, ou or au, varies as the vowel of the ultima, ο(ω) or α (η). 3. The accent remains on the penult. 155. The declension of εκείνος is like that of αυτός (except the accent). Note in the neuter sing. nom. and acc. έκεΐνο. 72 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR 166. οδτος and έκείνος are demonstrative pronouns. In contrast, οδτος refers, as a rule, to what is near or last mentioned, and έκείνος to what is remote, or absent. 157. Use of οδτος and έκείνος. I. When they are used with a substantive, they commonly have the predicate position: e.g., δ λόγος οδτος or οδτος δ λόγος, this word ; έκείνη ή ημέρα or ή ήμερα έκείνη, that day. 2. When the article does not occur with the sub¬ stantive, the substantive is in the predicate: e.g., τρίτην ταύτην ημέραν, this a third day (not this third day). 3. They are often used alone, without substan¬ tives: e.g., οδτος, this one (man or person); έκείνη, that woman; τούτο, this thing; ταϋτα, these things; etc. 158. Exercises I. I. έκείνος δέ δ δούλος άχέρχεται. 2. τούτο τδ τέκνον είσήρχετο εις τον οίκον έκείνον. 3· Εκείνος δίκαιός έστιν. 4· αυτή έστίν ή χρώτη εντολή. 5· Εκείνα ις ταίς ήμέραις κακοί χροφήται διήρχοντο τάς κώμας. 6. δ κύριος ελεγεν τοδτφ τους λόγους ζωής αιωνίου. II. ι. This world; that gift. 2. This disciple knows the law and the prophets. 3. This is the work of God. 4. Those children were going to him. 5. This commandment I write to the brethren. 6. On that day he was preaching in the temple. PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE ACTIVE 73 LESSON XXII Present Subjunctive Active 169. Vocabulary αμαρτάνω, I sin άναβαίνω, I go up , come up , ascend άνά, prep, (original meaning on , w/wn, along) usually with the accusative in the distribu¬ tive sense: άνά δύο, two by two άνά εκατόν, by hundreds ΐνα, conj. generally with subjunctive, in order that , that κατά, prep, (original meaning down) with gen., down (upon), against; with abl., down (from) ; with acc., down (along), through, according to. μετά, prep, (original meaning “ midst”) with the gen., with; with the acc., after; μετά ταΰτα, after these things, after this. μή, not χα^ρω, rejoice vuv, adv., now χώς, adv., how 160. From the previous lessons it has been learned that the Greek verb has tense, voice, and mode, like verbs in other languages. 161. It has been seen (14) that tense has to do with the action of the verb as regards the state of action. Voice (51 and 52) has to do with the action of the verb as regards the subject of the action. Mode has to do with the manner of affirmation, how it is made, and not with action as do voice and tense. 74 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR 162. It has been observed that the indicative is the mode of definite assertion. It is used to affirm positively, definitely, absolutely, undoubtingly. The mode has nothing to do with the actual facts (whether true or untrue), but only with the state¬ ment of them. The indicative states a thing as true. 163. The subjunctive mode is a mode of doubtful statement, of hesitating affirmation, of contingency. a. The subjunctive is usually found in two tenses, the present and the aorist. The perfect subjunctive is very rare. 164. The present subjunctive active of λύω is: Singular Plural 1. λύω 2. λύης 3· λύ η λύωμεν λύητε λύ(οσι(ν1) 165. Observe that: ι. The subjunctive has the primary active personal endings (see 17-19). 2. The long thematic vowel ω/η is the subjunctive mode sign. 3. In the second and third persons sing, η has iota-subscript (η) 166. The present subj. of είμί is: Singular Plural T T I. ω ώμεν 2- ί)ς ήτε 3· η ώσί(ν1) Note the circumflex accent. 167. The subjunctive is used in clauses of purpose after Yva. 1 See footnote to 142. PRESENT SUBJ. MIDD. AND PASS. 75 Examine closely the following sentences: έρχεται ινα βλέπη αυτόν, he comes that he may see him . ταΰτα λέγομεν ινα μή άμαρτάνωσι, we say this in order that they may not sin. 168. Note that the negative with the subjunctive is μή. 169. There is no time (absolute) element in the sub¬ junctive mode in any tense. The present subjunc¬ tive expresses linear or durative action without reference to time. See 14. 170. Exercises I. I. έγώ δέ έρχομαι Υνα τον κόσμον σώζω. 2. κηρύσσομεν ινα οι άνθρωποι εχωσι ζωήν αιώνιον. 3· πώς γε δύναται σώζειν;1 4· μετά ταΰτα απέρχεται εις τήν έρημον. 5· ° θεός λέγει ήμΐν ινα μή μένωμεν έν τή άμαρτίςι. 6. δ ’Ιησούς αυτός οΰκ έβάπτιζεν, άλλ’ οι μαθηταί αυτού. II. I. Now we become the children of God. 2. They baptize in order that they may glorify God. 3. You are not able to hear my word. 4. After these things he goes away in order that they may not see him. 5. How can (is able) he take away our sins? LESSON XXIII Present Subjunctive Middle and Passive 171. Vocabulary άσπάζομαι, I salute καινός, -ή, -όν, new ευαγγέλιον, τό, gospel μαρτυρία, ή, witnessing , δέχομαι, I receive witness , καθώς, adv., just as, even as testimony 1 The question mark (;) is the same in form as our semicolon. 76 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR ouv, postpositive adv., there - ούτως, adv. thus , in this fore, then, now. manner, so 172. The present middle and passive subjunctive of λύω. is: Singular Plural 1. λύωμαι λυώμεθα 2. λύη λόησθε 3· λύηται λύωνται / 173. Observe: ι. The middle and passive forms are alike (this was seen in the indicative also, 6o). 2. The mode sign ω/ v is the same as in the active (see 165, 2). 3. The personal endings are the primary middle (and passive) endings (see 54 and 60). a. In the second pers. sing, -η is for -ησαι; σ dropped out, then η and at contracted to η. Note iota-subscript under η 174. The subjunctive (first person plural) is used in exhortations: as χαίρωμεν έν τη άληθεία, let us rejoice in the truth. μή λέγωμεν κακά, let us not speak evil things. 175. Many verbs in Greek are followed by the genitive case, and many by the dative case, where the corresponding verbs in English would be fol¬ lowed by the objective case. In each instance the idea of the case is accented. ακούει τής φωνής, he hears the voice. (This just tells “kind” of sound.) The accusative SECOND AORIST INDICATIVE 77 may be used after ακούω; then the meaning of the sound is comprehended. χιστεύομεν αύτφ, we believe Jlim. άχοκρίνεται τφ τέκνφ, he answers the child. δουλεύω αύτφ, I serve him. Note that the dative accents the personal interest. 176. Exercises I. I. χιστεύωμεν τφ κυρίψ. 2. άγώμεθα υχδ των άχοστόλων. 3· θώς έκεϊνος δίκαιός έστιν, ώμεν δίκαιοι ήμεΐς. 4· «ΡΧΪ5 δ λόγος ήκούετο. 5· δεχώμεθα την μαρτυρίαν αυτού. 6. ηκουον των φωνών των δούλων. II. ι. Let us not answer him. 2. Let us salute the apostles. 3. Let us receive the truth in order that we may know it. 4. He was preaching the gospel of the new covenant. 5. He is able to take away our sins. 6. Let us be led by the Lord into truth. LESSON XXIV Second Aorist Indicative Active and Middle 177. Vocabulary άχέθανον, εβαλον, έγενόμην, ειδον, (είχον), είχα, ελαβον. I died ; second aor. of άχοθνήσκω. I threw , cast; second aor. of βάλλω. I became; second aor. of γίνομαι. I saw; second aor. — no present stem in use.. but όράω is used in present tense. I said; second aor. — no present stem in use, but λέγω is used in the present tense. I took; second aor. of λαμβάνω. 78 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR έλιχον, I left; second aor. of λείχω, εδρον, I found; second aor. of ευρίσκω, εσχον, I got ; second aor. of εχω. εφαγον, I ate; second aor. — no present stem in use, but έσθίω is used in the present tense, ήλθον, I went , came; second aor. — no present stem in use, but έρχομαι is used in the present tense. χαρέλαβον, I received; second aor. of χαραλαμβάνω. 178. The second aorist is so called in distinction from the first aorist , which is to be studied in Lesson XXXVI. They are not two different tenses, but second aorist and first aorist are two forms of the same tense. 179. As has already been learned (14), the funda¬ mental idea in tense is the “kind of action.” The present tense (and imperfect, 65, 69) expresses dura- tive or linear action. The aorist tense expresses - action in its simplest form — undefined; it does not divStinguish between complete or incomplete action. The aorist tense treats the action as a point; — this kind of action is called punctiliar: εχω, I have , am holding; εσχον, I got , obtained. 180. This kind of action (punctiliar) is timeless. But time is expressed in the indicative mode by the augment, — punctiliar action in past time, generally. In narrative the difference between the aorist in¬ dicative and the imperfect indicative is just this: the aorist indicative expresses punctiliar action in past time, while the imperfect indicative expresses durative action in past time. SECOND AORIST INDICATIVE 79 181. The second aorist 1 indicative active and mid¬ dle of λείπω is: Active Singular 1. ελιπον 2. ελιχες 3· ελιχε Plural έλίχομεν έλίχετε ελιχον Second aorist active infinitive, λιχεϊν. Middle 1. έλιχόμην έλιχόμεθα 2. έλίχου έλίχεσθε έλίχετο έλίχοντο Second aorist middle infinitive, λιχέσθαι. 182. Observe: i. The difference in form between the second aorist indicative and the imperfect in¬ dicative of the same verb is a difference in stem: aorist stem λιχ-; imperfect (having the present stem) λειχ-. 2. The secondary personal endings (66, 79) are used. 3. The augment in the aorist follows the same principles as it did in the imperfect. (70). 4. The accent of the second aorist infinitive is not recessive (11), but in the active is placed on the ultima, and in the midde on the penult. The endings, -α, -ας, -ε, -αμεν, -ατε, -αν, are found frequently with second aorist stems and almost exclusively with είχον. 183. Note that the infinitive has no augment. The aorist act. inf. λιχεΐν means simply to leave , the action 1 The second aorist of the thematic vowel °/e type is introduced here on account of its simplicity and its similarity in inflection to the imperfect, as well as on account of its frequent use. 80 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR is punctiliar and timeless; while the present act. infinitive λείχειν means to be leaving (or to keep leav¬ ing), the action is durative and timeless. So also in the middle. 184. The second aorist usually exhibits the simple stem of the verb. The second aorist given here is the thematic type, i.e., uses the thematic vowel %. Present Present Aorist Aorist stem theme stem theme βάλλω βαλλ- βαλλ°/ € βαλ- βαλ0/ € γίνομαι γιν- γιν% γεν- γεν% λείχω λειχ- λειχ°/€ λιχ- λΐΧ0/ί Note that the second aorist is known by its stem. 185. From the forms of the present, imperfect, per¬ fect, etc., it cannot be determined beforehand whether a verb has a first aorist or a second aorist, nor, if it has a second aorist, what the form of the second aorist is. To determine this, the verb must be examined in a lexicon. 186. The second aorist act. and middle are formed on the second aorist stem. The aorist passive of all verbs is different from the aorist middle. Review the meaning of the middle (52). έλεχόμην is second aorist indicative middle, I left for myself , etc. 187. The Greek aorist indicative is not the exact equivalent of any tense in English or in any other language. The Greek aorist and the English preterit do not exactly correspond. The translation given in the vocabulary is just to get the verb idea asso- SECOND AORIST SUBJUNCTIVE 81 dated with the verb form. To translate the Greek aorist ind., sometimes the English preterit is used, sometimes the perfect, sometimes the past. The Greek aorist ind. refers the action to the past without any exact specification as to antecedence of action or as to present results of action. 188. Exercises ■*1 I. I. ήλθε είς τδν οίκον. 2. έφάγομεν τον άρτον. 3· τφ κόσμφ ήν καί δ κόσμος δι’ αυτού έγένετο. φ ε?ς τά ϊδια ήλθεν καί οί (ίδιοι αυτόν ου χαρέλαβον. 5· ταύτα είχον δμΐν έν τώ ίε ρω. 6. μετά ταΰτα άχέθανεν τδ τέκνον. II. ι. He died on the third day. 2. He took the bread and ate (it). 3. The disciples obtained good promises. 4. They came and saw where (χοΰ) he was abiding. 5. The servant cast a stone into the boat. LESSON XXV Second Aorist Subjunctive Active and Middle Vocabulary άληθινός, -ή, -όν, true διάβολος, δ, devil βίος, δ, life έκεΐ, adv., there 189. Learn the capital letters in 1 of Lesson I. 190. The second aorist subjunctive active and mid¬ dle of λείχω is: Active Singular 1. λίχω 2. λίχης 3· Hxfl Plural 82 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR Middle 1. λίχωμαΕ 2. λίχη 3· λίχηται λιχώμεθα λίχησθε λίχωνται 191. Observe: ι. There is no augment in the aorist subjunctive. 2. The personal endings are the pri¬ mary active and middle. 3. The subjunctive mode sign is the long thematic vowel ω/η. 4. The only difference in form between the second aorist subj. (act. and middle) and the present subj. (act. and middle) is in the stem, — present stem λειχ-; aorist stem λιχ-. 192. Let it be remembered that the aorist subjunc¬ tive does not denote past time. But the real time of the subj. is future in relation to the speaker or writer ; and this time element is not due to the tense at all. 193. The distinction in meaning between the pres¬ ent subjunctive and the aorist subjunctive is only in the kind of action. The present subj. expresses durative action. The aorist subj. expresses punctiliar action. Example: μή άχοθνήσκωμεν έν τη αμαρτία, let US not be dying m sin , let us not continue to die (or keep on dying) in sin. μή άχοθάνωμεν έν τή αμαρτία, let US not die in sin. In the first example the present (subjunctive) represents the action in progress. In the second example the aorist (subjunctive) just treats the action as a single whole without any reference to THIRD DECLENSION 83 progress or completion. It is generally difficult to bring out the difference in an English translation. 194. The subjunctive is used in questions of doubt, where the speaker asks what he is to do or say: χώς εύρωμεν αύτόν; How are we to find him? τί εΥχω; What am I to say? What shall I say? έχιμένωμεν τή αμαρτία; Shall we remain in sin? 195. Exercises I. I. έγώ ουκ ήλθον βαλειν είρήνην έχί τήν γην. 2. αγωμεν καί ήμεΐς Υνα άχοθάνωμεν μετ’ αυτού. 3· οδτος ήλθεν είς μαρτυρίαν Υνα ημείς χαραλάβωμεν αύτόν. φ fjpov ούν λίθους Υνα βάλωσιν έχ’ αύτόν. 5· ταΰτα είχεν Ιησούς αύτοΐς έν τω ίερώ. II. ι. How shall we receive them? 2. Let us not become evil prophets. 3. What shall we eat? 4. The servants came in order that they might find the children. 5. He died that men might have life. LESSON XXVI Third Declension: Neuter Substantives in -ματ-. 196. Vocabulary αίμα, τό, blood ρήμα» τό, word γράμμα, τό, letter (of alpha- σχέρμα, τό, seed bet), writing στόμα, τό, mouth θέλημα, τό, will σώμα, τό, body δνομα, τό, name χάρισμα, τό, gift, free gift χνεΰμα, τό, spirit άγιος, -α, -ον, holy 84 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR 197. The third declension is commonly called the consonant declension because most of the nouns have stems ending in a consonant. A few nouns, included in this declension, ended in the vowels t and u, which were sometimes semivowels. 198. The case endings of the consonant declension Singular Plural Masc. and Fern. Neut. Masc. and Fern. Neut. Nom. -ς or none None -ες -a Gen. -ος -ος -ων -ων Abl. -ος -ος -ων -ων Loc. -t -t -σι -σι Ins. -1 -1 -σι -σι Dat. -t -1 -σι -σι Acc. -v or -a none (-νς), -ας -α Voc. none or like none -ες -α nom. or stem In the case endings final a is short. These forms must he thoroughly mastered. Note that the loc., ins., and dat. sing, use the locative ending -t; and in the plural these cases use the locative ending -σι (see p. 65 n.). The gen. and abl. plural ending -ων is the same for all the declensions. The neuter plural nom., acc., and voc. are always alike. The vocative plural is always the same as the nominative. THIRD DECLENSION 85 199. The declension of όνομα,1 name , is: STEM όνοματ- Singular Plural Nom. δνομα όνόματα Gen. όνόματος όνομάτων Abl. όνόματος όνομάτων Loc. όνόματι όνόμασι Ins. όνόματι όνόμασι Dat. όνόματι όνόμασι Acc. δνομα όνόματα Observe : ι. As in the neuters of the second declension, the nom. acc. and voc. sing, are alike, and the same cases in the plural are alike. 2. The nom. sing, is the mere stem, final τ being dropped. Note: The consonants that can stand at the close of a word in Greek are v, p, and ς (including ξ and ψ). All other consonants which would occur there are dropped. 3. In the loc., ins., dat., plural, όνόμασι, the τ of the stem drops out before σ. 201. In declining a substantive of the consonant declension it is necessary to know the stem. The stem is usually found by dropping the genitive sing, ending -ος. Thus: Nom. στόμα; gen. στόματος; stem στο ματ-. The genitive singular, then, must be known before nouns of the consonant declension can be declined. 202. The gender of the third declension substantives, except in the case of special classes like the sub- 1 Neuter substantives with nom. in -μα (stem -ματ-) are intro¬ duced first on account of their simplicity and importance. 86 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR stantives in -ματ-, must be learned with each word separately. 203. A neuter plural subject often has its verb in the singular : των δώδεκα άχοστόλων τα όνόματά έστιν ταΰτα, the names of the twelve apostles are these. 204. Exercises I. I. τοΰτό έστι τδ σώμα μου. 2. τα ρήματα ζωής αιωνίου εχεις. 3· γινώσκομεν τδ θέλημα του θεού, φ δνομα ήν αύτω Ιωάννης. 5* σπέρμα ’Αβραάμ έσμεν. 6. θέλετε άγειν έφ’ (against) ημάς τδ αίμα το ΰ άνθ ρώχο υ το υτο υ ; II. ι. This is the will of God. 2. These are the good seed. 3. The words of the prophet are written in the scriptures. 4. Let us believe on (είς) the name of the Lord. 5. That one was baptizing them in the holy spirit. 6. The will of God came through the mouths of the prophets. LESSON XXVn Future Indicative Active and Middle 205. Vocabulary δαιμόνιον, τό, demon καί, besides the usual connective use, and , is used in the sense of also , and even. χερί, prep, (original meaning around (on all sides)) with gen., about , concerning; with abl., from around; with acc., round about , about , concerning. ύχέρ, prep, (original meaning over , upper) with abl., in behalf of, in interest of; instead of; in place of: FUTURE INDICATIVE 87 for the sake of; about , concerning; with acc., over , above , beyond. ώς, relative, comparative, and temporal adv., as, when. 206. The future tense is made on aoristic (punctiliar) roots in some verbs and on durative roots in other verbs. The kind of action of the future may be either punctiliar or durative. But in use the future is generally punctiliar. 207. The future indicative, as in English, generally denotes what is going to take place. It is just the present vividly projected into the future. In Eng¬ lish it is done by “shall” in the first person and by “will” in the second and third persons. Yet the future ind. has modal aspects which will be pre¬ sented later. 208 . The future indicative active and middle of λ ύω is : Active Singular 1. λύσω, I shall loose 2. λύσεις etc. Plural λύσομεν λύσετε 3· λύσει λύσουσι Future active infinitive, λύσειν1 Middle Singular Plural 1. λύσομαι, I shall loose myself λυσόμεθα 2. λύση or for myself , etc. λύσεσθε 3· λύσεται λύσονται Future middle infinitive, λύσεσθαι 1 The future infinitive is found only six times in the New Testa¬ ment. εσεσθαί occurs four of the six times. 88 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR a . The future passive is quite different from the future middle, b. Except in the future and aorist, the middle and passive are alike in form. 209. Observe: I. The primary active and middle personal endings are used. 2. The tense-suffix is σ, added to the root λυ-. 3. The future stem is λυσ-. 4. The thematic vowel is %· Note that, while the present theme is λυ%, the future theme is λυσ°/€. 210. Most verbs whose verb stem ends in a single vowel (except the vowels α, ε, and 0) or a diphthong are conjugated in the future like λύσω, λύσομαι. EXAMPLES: πιστεύω; fut. χιστεύσω. ακούω; fut. άκούσομαι. κωλύω; fut. κωλύσω. 211. Future indicative of ε?μί is: Singular Plural I. εσομαι. I shall be, Ισόμεθα 2. εσγ) etc. · εσεσθε 3· εσται εσονται Future infinitive, εσεσθαι 212. Conditional sentences (see 149). The third class conditional sentence is the condition unde¬ termined , but with prospect of determination. Here the subjunctive after έάν (if) is used in the condition (if) clause. The conclusion naturally has the future indicative, but may have any tense of the indica¬ tive, subjunctive, or imperative. Examples : έάν χαραλάβητε έμέ, υμείς εσεσθε ol μαθηταί μου, if you will receive me , you shall be my disciples. FUTURE INDICATIVE 89 έάν εΐχωμεν ότι αμαρτίαν ου κ έχομεν, ή αλήθεια ούκ έστιν έν ήμΐν, if we say that we have not sin , the truth is not in us. 213. Exercises I. I. Χριστός υχέρ ήμών άχέθανεν. 2. έάν χιστεύωμεν τω όνόματι ’Ιησού Χριστού, χιστοί έσμεν. 3· ^ν χαραλά- βωσι τά βήματα αυτού, χιστεύσουσιν αυτώ. 4· ούτως έσται καί έν ταΐς ήμέραις τού υιού τού άνθρώχου. 5· περί τούτων μή εΤχωμεν. 6. ούτως δέ έσονται οί χρώτοι έσχατοι. II. ι. The sons of men shall believe on (εις) the word of God. 2. There shall be joy in heaven be¬ cause (οτι) he is saved. 3. Ye shall be with (μετά) me this day. 4. If he believe me, I shall hear him. 5. Let us go to him. LESSON XXVIII Future Indicative Active and Middle (Continued) 214. Vocabulary άγαχάω, I love αίτέω, I ask for (something) άκολουθέω, I follow γεννάω, I beget έ ρωτάω, I ask (question) ζάω, I live ζητέω, I seek λαλέω, I speak μαρτυρέω, I bear witness , testify χαρακαλέω, I beseech , exhort , encourage χοιέω, I do , make 90 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR πληρόω, I fill, make full τη ρέω, I keep φανερόω, make manifest Notice that the present stem of these verbs ends in one of three vowels, α, ε, or o. These are called con¬ tract verbs because in the conjugation of the present system these vowels contract with the thematic vowel (and personal ending) . These verbs in -άω, -έω, and -όω are contracted only in the present and im¬ perfect, and will be studied in Lessons XLIX, etc. In all other systems these verbs, if regular, are con¬ jugated like the corresponding tenses of λύω. 215. The future of αγαπάω is αγαπήσω; λαλέω is λαλήσω; φανερόω is φανερώσω. From these forms it is evident that verbs whose stems end in a short vowel (α, ε, o) generally lengthen that vowel before -σ% 1 of the future, and then are con¬ jugated like λύσω (see 208). a is lengthened to η (but a after ε, c, or p is length- ε is lengthened to η ened to a not η) o is lengthened to ω Thus: -a 4- σ°/€ = -ησ°/* -ε + σ% = -ησ% -ο + σ% = -ωσ0/ € 216. ι. The future of βλέπω (stem βλεπ-) is βλέψω; νίπτω (stem νιβ-) is νίψω; γράφω (stem γραφ-) is γράψω. 1 This is also true of other tense-suffixes. FUTURE INDICATIVE 91 From this it is seen that stems in π, β, or φ unite with σ, forming ψ ; that is χ + σ = ψ ; β + σ= ψ; φ + σ = ψ. 2. The future of διώκω (stem διωκ-) is διώξω; ά'γω (stem άγ-) is αξω; εχω (stem σεχ-) is εξω. Thus it is seen that stems in κ, γ, or χ unite with σ forming ξ ; that is, κ + σ= ξ; γ + σ = ξ ; χ 4- σ = ξ. 3. The future of σώζω (stem σωδ-) is σώσω; πείθω (stem πειθ-) is πείσω. From this it is seen that stems in τ, δ, or Θ drop τ, δ, or Θ before σ, leaving simple σ; that is, τσ = σ; δσ = σ; θσ = σ. 217. Certain consonants are called mutes or stops because in forming them the passage of the breath is for a moment closed. 1 . The consonants π, β, φ are called labial mutes or stops, because they are made with the lips. 2. κ, γ, χ are called palatal mutes or stops, because they are made with the soft palate. 3. τ, δ, Θ are called lingual (or dental), because they are made with the tongue (or teeth) . 218. As an aid to memory the changes in mute- stems in forming the future may be exhibited thus: Labials, π, β, φ 4- σ = ψ. Palatals, κ, γ, χ Η- σ = ξ. Linguals, τ, δ, θ + σ = σ. 92 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR Keep in memory this order of the mutes. They occasion many important changes in formation of words. 219. The verb-stem in many verbs is not the same as the present stem: in the case of νίχτω it was observed that the verb-stem is νΦ-; the present stem νιχτ-; and the verb-stem of σώζω is σωδ.1 The verb-stem of φυλάσσω is φυλακ-; the future is φυλάξω. The future of βαχτίζω (βαχτιδ-) is βαχτίσω. 220. The future of any word cannot be certainly determined beforehand. A verb may make its future on a durative root, a punctiliar (aoristic) root, or on a different verb-root, έχω has two futures, έξω2 (durative) and σχήσω (punctiliar). The future of έρχομαι is έλεύσομαι. The future of some verbs occurs only in the middle voice: e.g., γινώσκω, future γνώσομαι. In general a lexicon must be con¬ sulted for each verb. The future of verbs with liquid stems (λ, μ, v, p) will be given in Lesson XLVI. 221. Exercises I. I. τηρήσομεν τάς έντολάς αυτού. 2. ακολουθήσω σοι,3 Κύριε. 3· γνωσόμεθα αυτόν, ότι όψόμεθα4 αυτόν καθώς έστιν. φ εκείνη τή ήμέρςε αίτήσεσθε έν τφ δνόματί μου καί έρωτήσω αυτόν χερί υμών. 5· άγαχήσεις κύριον τον θεόν σου έν όλη τη καρδία σου καί έν όλη τη ψυχή σου καί έν όλη τη διανοία (mind) σου. αυτή έστίν ή χρώτη έντολή. 6. τό χνεύμα άξει ημάς εις την άλήθειαν. 1 ζ is treated as a combination of δ + z (or ζδ). 2 Note the rough breathing on εξω. 3άκολουθέω is followed by the associative-instrumental case. 4 From οχτομαι, I see; stem ox-. THIRD DECLENSION — CONTINUED 93 II. I. We shall know the truth and do it. 2. We shall glorify God. 3. They will bear witness con¬ cerning him. 4. We shall persuade our hearts. 5. He will baptize you. 6. The faithful will pro¬ claim the word of God. 7. I shall do the will of God. I LESSON XXIX Third Declension: Lingual Mute Stems 222. Vocabulary αρχών, -οντος, δ, ruler , prince έλχίς, -ίδος, ή, hope νύξ, νυκτός, ή, night χούς, χοδός, δ, foot φως, φωτός, τό, light χάρις, -ιτος, ή, grace έργασία, ή, work , business 223. Note that the stem of έλχίς is έλχιδ-; χάρις is χαριτ-; νύξ is νυκτ-. Observe that the stem in all these substantives end in a lingual mute, and that the nominative is formed by adding ς to the stem. Thus, έλχιδς becomes έλχίς; χαριτς becomes χάρις; νυκτς becomes νυκς = νύξ. For the changes that occur when a mute and ς come together see 216 and 218. 94 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR 224. The declension of έλχίς, hope; χάρις, grace; and νύξ, night: Stem έλχιδ- STEM χαριτ- Singular Stem νυκτ Nom. έλχίς χάρις νύξ Gen. έλχίδος χάριτος νυκτός Abl. έλχίδος χάριτος νυκτός Loc. έλχίδι χάριτι νυκτ£ Ins. έλχίδι χάριτι νυκτί Dat. έλχίδι χάριτι νυκτί Acc. έλχίδα χάριν Plural νύκτα Nom. έλχίδες χάριτες νύκτες Gen. έλχίδων χαρίτων νυκτών Abl. έλχίδο)ν χαρίτων νυκτών Loc. έλχίσι χάρισι νυξί Ins. έλχίσι χάρισι νυξί Dat. έλχίσι χάρισι νυξί Acc. έλχίδας χάριτας νύκτας a. In the accusative singular forms like έλχίδαν, νύκταν, are found, b. In the ace. singular, the form χάριτα often occurs, c. Vocatives in this de¬ clension are rare and will be specially mentioned whenever separate forms occur. 225. Observe that: I. In the loc. ins. and dat. plu. a lingual mute drops out before -σι (see 216, 3, 218). 2. In the case of νυξί, κσ changes to ξ after τ dropped out. 226. Monosyllables of the third declension gener¬ ally have the accent on the ultima in the gen., abl., THIRD DECLENSION — CONTINUED 95 ioc., ins., and dat. of both numbers. In the gen. plu. ών has the circumflex. But φώς and χαϊς are accented in gen. plu. thus, φώτων, χαίδων. 227. When substantives with stems in -ιτ, -ιδ, or -ιθ are not accented on the ultima, the acc. sing, gen¬ erally has v in place of the mute (τ, δ, Θ), e.g., χάρις (χαριτ-), acc. χάριν (but see 224 b ); but when the accent is on the ultima, the acc. is generally formed like the acc. of έλχίς, έλχίδα. 228. Declension of άρχων, ruler , is: Stem άρχοντ Singular Plural Nom. άρχων άρχοντες Gen. άρχοντος άρχόντων Abl. άρχοντος αρχόντων Loc. άρχοντι ά'ρχουσι Ins. άρχοντι άρχουσι Dat. άρχοντι άρχουσι Acc. άρχοντα άρχοντας 229. Observe that: 1. The nom. sing, of ά| formed from the mere stem without adding any¬ thing; final τ of the stem is dropped, for a Greek word cannot end in τ (see 200, 2 note) ; then 0 of the stem is lengthened (formative lengthening) to ω. 2. When -ντ- of the stem comes before -σι of the loc., ins., and dat. plur., both v and τ are dropped and the 0 of the stem is lengthened to ou (compen¬ satory lengthening) . (-ντ- always drops out before -σι and the preceding vowel lengthened.) 96 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR 230. In expressions of time the locative denotes a point in which; the accusative duration of , and the genitive time within which (kind of time): e.g., νυκτί (or έν νυκτί), in the night , νύκτα, during the night; νυκτός, at night (not day). 231. Exercises I. I. δ ’Ιησούς ήλθεν είς τήν οικίαν τού αρχοντος. 2. τδ φώς έν τή σκοτίςι φαίνει.1 3· έξήλθεν ή έλχίς τής έργασίας αυτών. 4· νύξ ούκ εσται ετι.2 5· Εκείνη τή νυκτί ελαβον αυτόν. 6. υμείς έστε τδ φώς τού κόσμου. 7· τ7) χάριτι δέ θεού σωζόμεθα ημείς. 8. ένιπτε τούς χόδας των μαθητών. 9· °δ Υ<*ρ ^στε δχδ νόμον άλλ’ ύχδ χάριν. II. ι. They shall bear witness concerning him that (ότι) he is the light. 2. We are saved by grace. 3. We are not under law but under grace. 4. We have hope in God. 5. The ruler came to him at night. LESSON XXX Participles: The Present, Active, Middle, and Passive 232. Vocabulary άλλότριος,-α,-ον, άρτι, adv., δουλεύω, ή, conj., καρπός, δ, τυφλός, -ή, -όν, φανερός, -ά, -όν, belonging to another (another’s), strange now , just now , this moment I am a servant , I serve or fruit blind manifest 2 ετι, still, yet: ούκ, Ιτι, no longer. 1 φαίνω, I shine. PRESENT PARTICIPLE 97 233. The present active participle of λύω: Stem λυοντ-, loosing Singular Masc. Fem. Neut. Nom. λύων λύουσα λΰ ον Gen. λύοντος λυούσης λύοντος Abl. λύοντος λυούσης λύοντος Loc. λύοντι λυούση λύοντι Ins. λύοντι λυούσγ) λύοντι Dat. λύοντι λυούσγ) λύοντι Acc. λύοντα λύουσαν λΰον ψ Plural Nom. λύοντες λύουσαι λυοντα Gen. λυόντων λυουσών λυόντων Abl. λυόντων λυουσών λυόντων Loc. λύουσι λυουσαις λύουσι Ins. λύουσι λυούσαις λύουσι Dat. λύουσι λυούσαις λύουσι Acc. λύοντας λυούσας λύοντα 234. Observe: 1. The participle is declined in th genders. 2. The stem λυοντ- becomes λ 6ων in the nom. masc. sing., like αρχών, and is declined like αρχών. 3. The fern. nom. sing, λύουσα is for λυονσα for λυοντια.1 The fern, is declined like γλώσσα (105) of the first declension. 4. The neuter nom. and acc. sing, λ Gov is the simple stem, final τ being dropped. (229, 200, 2.) 1 toe is the feminine suffix added to the stem. Apparently τι (t is a semivowel) became σ, then v was dropped before σ and 0 length¬ ened (compensatory) to ou. 98 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR The neuter nom. and ace. plur. ends in -a. Other¬ wise the neuter forms are like the masculine. 5. The masculine and neut. are declined in the third declension ; the fern, in the first. 6. Note that participles are accented like adjec¬ tives; but the gen. and abl. fern, plural have the cir¬ cumflex accent over the ultima like substantives of the first declension The accent is not recessive. The accent of the present active participle of ακούω is άκούων, άκούουσα, άκοΰον. Observe the position of the accent in the neuter — not recessive. 235. Learn the pres, participle of είμί (§ ιό). 236. The future active participle of λύω, viz., λύσων, λύσουσα, λ Οσον, going to loose , is declined like the present participle of λύω. It is rare in the New Testament. 237. The present middle and passive participle of λύω is: Middle Masc. Fern. Neuter λυόμενος λυόμενη λυόμενον, loosing {for) oneself. Passive λυόμενος λυομένη λυόμενον, being loosed Observe that the present middle and passive par¬ ticiples are alike in form. λυόμενος is declined like αγαθός, λυόμενη like άγαθή, and λυόμενον like άγαθόν, except in accent. Thus it is seen that the present, middle, and passive parti¬ ciples are declined like adjectives of the first and second declensions. PRESENT AND FUTURE PARTICIPLES 99 238. The future middle participle of λύω is λυσόμενος, -η, -ον, going to loose (for) oneself; and is declined like λυόμενος, -η, -ον. This is also rare in the New Testa¬ ment. 239. It is to be observed that the present participles are made on the present stem, and the future act. and middle participles are made on the future stem. In a mechanical way, the present active, middle, and passive participles of any regular verb may be formed by adding -ων, -ουσα, -ον and -μένος, -μένη, -μενον to the present stem of the verb. Also the future act. and middle participles may be made by adding the same endings to the future stem of a verb. (See 209, 215, 216, 218.) 240. The participle is a verbal adjective. It is both verb and adjective at the same time. 1. Being an adjective, the participle is declined in gender, number, and case; it agrees in gender, number and case with the substantive that it modi- fies; like other adjectives it is either attributive or predicate; and with the article it is used as a sub¬ stantive. 2. Being a verb also, the participle has voice and tense; governs the cases that the verb takes; and like other verbs it has adverbial modifiers (adjuncts). 241. The participle has not time in itself. Time with the participle is purely relative; it gets its time from the verb with which it is used. 242. Tense in the participle expresses “kind of action”: the present part., durative action; the aorist participle, punctiliar action. 100 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR 243. The participle has no personal endings and is therefore not limited by a subject. The participle has no subject. It makes no affirmation and is not a mode. 244. Note the simple attributive use of the par¬ ticiple with a substantive: 1. ή μένουσα έλχίς, the abiding hope 2. δ άνθρωπος δ λέγων ταϋτα, the man saying these things , (the man who says these things). 245. Examine carefully the following: 1. 6 χιστεόων, the one believing , he who believes 2. δ γινώσκων, the one knowing , he who knows 3. δ άχουόμενος, the one being.heard , he who is heard 4. δ χρινόμενος, the one being judged , he who is judged 5. δ δεχόμενος, the one receiving , he who receives 6. τό έξερχόμενον, the thing coming out , that which comes out 7. δ λυόμενος, (Mid.), the one loosing (for) himself 8. τά μή βλεχόμενα μένει, the things not seen abide The article and participle in this use are practically equivalent to a relative clause, though not actually equivalent. The article and participle may be in any case: e.g., 9. δ κύριος σώζει τδν χιστεύοντα έν αύτώ, the Lord saves the one believing (him who believes) on Him. ΙΟ. χιστεύομεν έν τφ χέμχοντι αυτόν, we believe in the one sending (him who sends) him. These examples practically cover the attributive use of the participle. SECOND AORIST PARTICIPLE 101 246. The negative used with the participle is gen¬ erally μή, not. 247. Exercises I. I. 6 μενών έν αύτώ έχει έλπίδα. 2. ουτός έστιν 6 βαπτίζων έν πνεύματι άγίψ. 3· δ γινώσκων τον θεόν ακούει ήμών. 4· δ θεός αγάπη έστιν, καί 6 μενών έν τή αγάπη έν τφ θεφ μένει καί ό θεός έν αύτώ μένει. 5· άκούοντες έπίστευον έν τφ έγείροντι τούς νεκρούς. II. ι. He who receives us receives Him. 2. Let us believe on him who raises the dead. 3. This is. he who takes away the sins of the world. 4. He who has grace remains in hope. 5. That day we shall see him who comes in the name of the Lord. LESSON XXXI Participles: The Second Aorist Active and Middle 248 . V OCABULARY άχοθανών, second aorist active participle of αποθνήσκω, βαλών, second aorist active participle of βάλλω, γενόμενος, second aorist middle participle of γίνομαι, είχών, second aorist active participle; no present stem; λέγω used in present, έλθών, second aorist active participle; no present stem; έρχομαι used in present, ίδών, second aorist active participle; no present stem; όράω used in present, λαβών, second aorist active participle of λαμβάνω. 249. It will be seen from the vocabulary that the second aorist active and middle participles of the 102 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR thematic vowel type have the same endings as the present active and middle participles, -o^v and -μένος. 250. The declension of λαβών, -οΰσα, -όν, the second aorist active participle of λαμβάνω, is: Stem λαβοντ- Singular Masc. Fem. Neut. Nom. λαβών λαβοΰσα λαβόν Gen. λαβόντος λαβούσης λαβόντος Abl. λαβόντος λαβούσης λαβόντος Loc. λαβόντι λαβούση λαβόντι Ins. λαβόντι λαβούση λαβόντι Dat. λαβόντι λαβούση λαβόντι Acc. λαβόντα λαβοΰσαν Plural λαβόν Masc. Fem. Neut. Nom. λαβόντες λαβοΰσαι λαβόντα Gen. λαβόντων λαβουσών λαβόντων Abl. λαβόντων λαβουσών λαβόντων Loc. λαβοΰσι λαβούσαις λαβοΰσι Ins. λαβοΰσι λαβούσαις λαβοΰσι Dat. λαβοΰσι λαβούσαις λαβοΰσι Acc. λαβόντας λαβοόσας λαβόντα 251. Observe: I. The second aorist active participle of the thematic vowel type is declined like the present active participle in -ων (-οντ), except for the accent. 2. It is formed on the second aorist stem, and has no augment. 252. The second aorist middle participle (λαβόμενος, -μένη, -μενον) is declined exactly like the present USES OF THE PARTICIPLE 103 middle participle. The difference in form lies in the stem: λαβόμενος (stem λαβ-), aorist middle participle; λαμβανόμενος (stem λαμβαν-), present middle participle. 253. The aorist participle is used attributively with the article, as is the present participle (244, 245). The difference in meaning is that the present ex¬ presses durative action and the aorist, punctiliar action. 6 λαμβάνων, the one receiving , he who receives δ λαβών, the one having received , he who received δ γινόμενος, the one becoming , he who becomes δ γενόμενος, the one having become , he who became 254. All participles may be used in the predicate. Study these examples carefully: I. ε!πών ταΰτα οιχήλθεν, a. Having said this b. When he said this c. After he said this d. He said this and he went away 2. ίδών ταΰτα έδόξαζε τον θεόν, a. Seeing this b. When he saw this c. Because he saw this he was glorifying God 3. είπών ταΰτα απέρχεται, a. Having said this b. After he said this he goes away 4· παρέλαβον αυτόν ε(πόντα ταΰτα, They received him < when he said this , after he said this , because he said this , a. b. c. 104 , BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR - now I see 5- τυφλός ών άρτι βλέπω, a. Being blind b. Whereas I was blind 6. έρχομαι ζητών καρπόν, seeking fruit , a. I come to seek fruit , b. V they were announcing 7. πορευόμενοι έκήρυσσον, a. Advancing b. As they were advancing c. While they were advancing v 8. ήλθον ζητών καρπόν, _ f seeking fruit, a. I came λ . , , ·. r to seek jrmt, b. 9. όχολαβών είχεν, answering (catching up in speech) he said. 255. From the examples given above it is to be observed that: 1. The action of the present participle may pre¬ cede (antecedent, Ex. 5), coincide with (simul¬ taneous, Ex. 7), or follow (subsequent, Ex. 8 and 6) the action of the principal verb. 2. The action of the aorist participle may be antecedent to (Ex. 1, 2 b, c , 3 and 4), or simul¬ taneous with (Ex. 2 a, 9), that of the principal verb. The aorist participle does not express subsequent action, although it may be used proleptically. Whether the action expressed by a participle is antecedent, simultaneous, or subsequent to that of the principal verb must be determined from the context. USES OF THE PARTICIPLE 105 256. The participles in the examples under 254 are varieties of what is called the circumstantial par¬ ticiple. The circumstantial participle is practically an additional statement added more or less loosely to the verbal notion of the principal verb. It may agree with the subject or object of the principal verb, or with any other substantive or pronoun in the sentence (see 254, 4). The participle in itself does not express time, manner, cause, purpose, etc., as suggested in the translation of the examples in 254. These ideas are not in the participle, but are sug¬ gested by the context. 257. Exercises I. I. βλέπει τον κύριον έρχόμενον πρδς αυτόν καί λέγει αυτφ Οδτός έστιν δ α’ίρων τάς αμαρτίας τού κόσμου. 2. ού τδ είσερχόμενον εις τδ στόμα κοινοί (defiles) άνθρωπον άλλα τδ έξερχόμενον έκ τού στόματος τούτο κοινοί άνθρωπον. 3· πορευόμενοι δέ κηρύσσετε λέγοντες δτι δ κύριος σώζει τούς πιστεύοντας έν αυτω. 4· ταΰτα γράφω υμΐν περί των μή ^δεχόμενων έμέ. 5· έλθών ούν δ ’Ιησούς εύρεν αυτόν. II. ι. He rejoices, saying that he saw the spirit coming upon (έπί)1 him. 2. We saw him while he was teaching in the temple. 3. The Lord said to those who were coming to him that God hears those believing on Him. 4. When he saw the child he went away. 5. Not having received the promises they died. ilxl (! τις εΐ; who art thou? 2. τίνα μισθόν έχετε; what pay (reward) have you ? 3. τίς έστιν δ άνθρωπος ουτος; who is this man? 4. τίνα ζητείτε; whom are you seeking? 5. τί ποιήσω; what shall I do? 6. γινώσκετε τίς έστιν δ άνήρ, you know who the man is. Note: 1. The interrogative τίς is used as a sub¬ stantive (1, 3 and 4) or as an adjective (2). 2. It is used in both direct (1-5) and indirect (6) questions. 283. The neuter accusative τί is frequently used adverbially in the sense of “why.” τί με λέγεις αγαθόν; why do you call me good? 284. In indirect questions the same mode and tense is generally found as in the direct; and the same interrogative words: είδε πού μένετε, he saw where y ou are staying. έγίνωσκε τί έστιν έν άνθρώπω, he knew what is in man. 285. Study carefully the following examples of the use of the indefinite pronoun: I. είπέν τις αυτφ, one (a certain man) said to him. 2 τινές δέ έξ αυτών εΤπον, some (certain ones) oj them said. he went into a certain village. 3. είσήλθεν είς κώμην τινά, THIRD DECLENSION — CONTINUED 117 4. άνθρωχός τις είχεν δύο υιούς, a certain man had two sons. Note that the indefinite τις is used as a substantive (1 and 2), or as an adjective (3 and 4). 286. Exercises I. I. τι θέλετε χοιήσω ύμίν; 2. ή χίστις σου σώζει σε. 3· αλλά είσίν έξ υμών τινές ο” ου χιστεύουσιν. 4· τΤ) δυνάμει του χνεύματος εις Γαλιλαίαν εισέρχεται. 5· είδομέν τινα έν τφ όνόματί σου έκβάλλοντα δαιμόνια. 6. γράψω έχ’ αύτδν τδ δνομα του θεού μου καί τδ δνομα τής χόλεως τού θεού μου. II. ι. What shall we say? 2. Ye have power to become the children of God. 3. In a certain city he was preaching the word. 4. A certain man said, “Lord, I will follow thee.” 5. Why are you going away? 6. The faith which we have saves men. LESSON XXXV Third Declension (Continued): Stems in -ευ (ef) and -εσ. 287. Vocabulary άρχιερεύς, -έως, δ, chief priest βασιλεύς, -έως, δ, king γραμματεύς, -έως, δ, scribe ίερεύς, -έως, δ, priest γένος, -ους, τό, race έθνος, -ους, τό, nation έθος, -ους, τό, custom έλεος, -ους, τό, pity , mercy έτος, -ους, τό, year μέλος, -ους, τό, member μέρος, -ους, τό, part χλήθος, -ους, τό, crowd , midtitude σκότος, -ους, τό, darkness τέλος , -ους, τό, end 118 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR 288. The declension of βασιλεύς is: Stem βασιλευ(/0- 1 Singular Plural Nom. βασιλεύς Ν. V. βασιλείς Gen. βασιλέως βασιλέων Abl. βασιλέως βασιλέων Loc. βασιλει βασιλεΰσι Ins. βασιλει βασιλεΰσι Dat. βασιλει βασιλεΰσι Acc. βασιλέα βασιλείς Voc. βασιλεύ Observe: 1. The final υ (f) of the stem is dropped when it would come between two vowels; it is retained when final (vocative) or followed by a con¬ sonant (nom. sing.; loc., ins., and dat. plur.). 2. In the loc., ins., and dat. sing., and in the nom. and acc. plural contraction takes place. 3. In the acc. sing, -a is the case ending and not -v. The acc. plural has been assimilated to the nominative. Com¬ pare βασιλεύς with πόλις. 289. All substantives with nom. sing, in -εύς are masculine, and are declined like βασιλεύς. 290. The declension of γένος is: STEM γενεσ- Singnlar Nom. γένος Gen. γένους Abl. γένους Plural γένη γενών (γενέων) γενών (γενέων) 1 f, vau, called also digamma, an old letter standing in the alpha¬ bet after ε, and pronounced like w. Its presence as a semi-vowel is often shown by u. THIRD DECLENSION — CONTINUED 119 Loc. γένεε Ins. γένεε Dat. γένεε Acc. γένος γένεσε γένεσε γένεσε γένη Observe: ι. The nom. (and acc.) is the stem with vowel s strengthened to o. 2. In all other cases the σ of the stem is dropped, and contraction of the con¬ current vowels takes place. a. In the gen. and abl. sing, γένους came from γένεσος; σ dropped out, ε -f- o contracted to ou. b. In the loc., ins., and dat. sing, γένεε came from γένεσε; σ dropped out, ε + ε contracted to -εε. c. The nom. and acc. plural γένη came from γένεσα; σ dropped out, ε a contracted to η. d. In {he gen. and abl. plural γενών (γενέων) came from γενέσων; σ dropped out, ε + ω contracted to ω, or remained uncontracted as γενεών, β. The accent of the contracted gen. and abl. plural is a circumflex over the ultima. 291. Like γένος are declined all neuters with nom. sing, in -ος (stem -εσ). 292. Exercises I. I. σύ εε 6 βασελεύς των Τουδαεων. 2. ο? βασελεες των έθνών κυρεεύουσεν 1 αυτών. 3· άλλ’ ουχω2τδ τέλος έστίν. 4· εμελλεν ’Ιησούς άχοθνήσκεεν υχέρ του έθνους, καί ουχ υχέρ τού έθνους μόνον.* 5· 0Ι^κ εχεες μέρος μετ’ έμού. 6. οε άρχεερείς είχον Ουκ έχομεν βασελέα. II. I. The multitude will follow him. 2. That one is not king of this world. 3. This is the gospel 1 κυριεύω, to be lord of, or to rule (over), with the genitive. 2 ουπω, not yet. 8 μόνον, adv.. onlu. 120 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR which I proclaim among (έν) the nations. 4. You have a part in the kingdom of heaven. 5. The scribes and priests have not mercy. LESSON XXXVI First Aorist Indicative Active and Middle 293. Vocabulary αγιάζω, I sanctify καθαρίζω, I purify βασιλεύω, I reign , I am king καταλύω, I destroy θεάομαι, I behold τυφλόω, I make blind, blind 294. The second aorist tense (178) is older than the first aorist. As tense the first aorist is not a dif¬ ferent tense from the second aorist. The second and first aorists are just two different forms of the same tense. 295. The first aorist indicative active of λύω is: Stem λυσ(α)- Singular 1. έλυσα, I loosed , 2. ελυσας etc. 3. ελυσε Plural 1. έλύσαμεν 2. έλύσατε 3· έλυσαν First aorist active infinitive, λύσαι For translation of the aorist, see 187. 296. On the formation of the first aorist it is to be observed : 1 . The first aorist stem is formed by adding -σα to the verb stem. 2. The secondary active personal endings (see 66) FIRST AORIST INDICATIVE 121 are used. But -v is not used in the first singular; and -e of the third sing, seemingly takes the place of a. 3. In the indicative there is an augment as in the second aorist (182. 3, and 70). 4. The infinitive ending is -at ; the accent is on the penult. 297. The first aorist indicative middle of λύω is: Singular 1. έλυσάμην I loosed 2. έλύσω ( for ) myself , 3. έλύσατο etc. Plural 1. έλυσάμεθα 2. έλύσασθε 3. έλύσαντο First aorist middle infinitive, λύσασθαι a. The second pers. sing, έλύσω came from έλύσασο; σ dropped out, and the concurrent vowels a and 0 contracted to ω. 298. Observe: 1. That the secondary middle end¬ ings (see 80) are added directly to the theme λυσα-. 2. The middle infinitive ending -σθαι is added to the theme λυσα-. 299. The same principles of augment are found in the first aorist indicative as in the second aorist (182. 3) and imperfect (70). 300. The form έλύσατο may be analyzed thus: έ-λύ- σα-το; έ is the augment; λυ- is the verb-stem, σα is the tense suffix; λυσ(α) is the tense stem, λυσα is the tense theme, and το is the secondary middle per¬ sonal ending of the third person. Analyze the active έλύσατε. For the meaning of the aorist middle see Lesson XXIV, and 52. 122 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR 301. Verbs with stems ending in a vowel (except a, ε, o) regularly form the first aorist (if they have a first aorist) like λύω. Thus: κωλύο), I hinder — first aorist έκώλυσα. πιστεύω, I believe — first aorist έπίστευσα. 302. Generally, verbs that have a first aorist do not have a second aorist; and verbs that have a second aorist do not have a first aorist. a. A few verbs have both aorists. When they occur, the first aorist is usually transitive and the second aorist intransitive. In the New Testament it is common for a second aorist stem to have a of the first aorist: thus είδα, ' είδας, ε’ίδαμεν, etc.; είπα, etc. 303. i. Verbs with stems ending in a short vowel α, ε, or o, form the first aorist by lengthening the vowel before the tense suffix σα (as in the future before σ%, 215): a is lengthened to η (except after ε, i, or p, when ε is lengthened to η it is lengthened to a.) 0 is lengthened to ω. Thus: αγαπάω, I love , first aorist ήγάπησα. ποιέω, I do, make , first aorist έποίησα. πληρόω, I fill , first aorist έπλήρωσα. Active infinitives, άγαπήσαι, ποιήσαι, πληρώσαι. 2. But a few verbs like καλέω, I call, and τελέω, I end, I complete, do not lengthen ε before the aorist tense suffix. Thus: καλέω, I call, first aorist έκάλεσα τελέω, I finish , first aorist έτέλεσα FIRST AORIST INDICATIVE 123 3. Verb stems with endings in mutes make the same changes with σ of -σα to form the aorist, as was made with σ of the future, 215-16-17. Thus : Labial (χβφ) : χέμχω, aorist εχεμψα γράφω, aorist έγραψα Palatal (κγχ) : διώκω, aorist έδιωξα διαλέγω, aorist διέλεξα Lingual (τδθ): σώζω (σωδ-), aorist έσωσα χείθω, aorist έχεισα 304. There is no difference in meaning between a first aorist and a second aorist. Both express punc- tiliar action — point action. See 178-179. 305. There were originally two verb-types, the one denoting durative or linear action, the other momen¬ tary, or punctiliar action. Thus in έσθίω the verb- stem is durative or linear, and in εφαγον the verb- stem is punctiliar. So in English “blink the eye” is a different kind of action from “live a life.” In Greek this matter of the “kind of action” in the verb-stem (or root), called Aktionsart, applies to all verbs. This “kind of action” of the verb-stem itself was before there was any idea of the later tense development. The aorist tense at first was used with verb-stems of punctiliar sense. The verb-stem itself may accent the beginning of the action, the end of the action, or the action as a whole. The aorist tense itself always means point -action (punctiliar action). But the individual verb-stem meaning may deflect the punctiliar action to the beginning or to the end. Consequently, in the aorist the tense idea is to be 124 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR combined with the verb-stem meaning. Thus in punctiliar action three distinctions arise: (i) the unmodified point-action, called constative; (2) the point action with the stress on the beginning of the action, called ingressive ; (3) the point-action with the stress on the conclusion or end of the action, called effective. Thus: έκ του πληρώματος αύτοΰ ήμεΐς έλάβομεν, of his fulness we received. (Effective.) 6 λόγος σαρξ έγένετο, the word became flesh. (Ingressive.) έσκήνωσεν έν ήμΐν, he dwelt among us. (Constative.) Sometimes the same word can be used for each of these ideas; as βάλει v may mean “throw” (consta¬ tive), or “let fly” (ingressive), or “hit” (effective). 306. The aorist tense, although at first it was con¬ fined to verbs of punctiliar action, came gradually to be made on verbs of durative action. (So also verbs of durative action came to have the tenses of punctiliar action.) Thus the tenses came to be used for the expression of the idea that once belonged only to the verb-stem (or root). That is, the aorist tense imposed a punctiliar idea on a durative verb- stem. (So also the present tense imposed a durative idea on a punctiliar verb-stem.) Thus the aorist just treats as punctiliar an act which is not in itself point-action. This is the advance that the tense makes on the verb-stem (or root). So all aorists are punctiliar, in fact or statement. 307. Of course the “kind of action” of the tense (punctiliar) and the “kind of action” of the verb- FIRST AORIST SUBJUNCTIVE 125 stem (Aktionsart) run through the whole tense (modes, infinitive, and participle). 308. What was said in Lessons XXIV and XXV about the meaning of the second aorist applies also to the first aorist; and what is said in this lesson applies to the second aorist. Review the meaning of the modes. 309. Exercises I. I. είς τούτο γάρ Χρίστος άχέθανεν καί έζησεν. 2. ούκ ήλθον καταλύσαι τον νόμον άλλα χληρώσαι. 3· έγραψα υμϊν, χαιδία, ότι γινώσκετε τδν πατέρα. 4* εζησαν και έβασίλευσαν μετά τού χριστού χίλια (thousand) έτη. 5· αυτός ήγάχησεν ημάς. 6. έθεάσαντο ά έχοίησεν καί έχίστευσαν εις αυτόν. II. ι. Darkness blinded his eyes. 2. We did not receive the gospel because we did not hear the word. 3. They made him king. 4. He came to destroy the works of the devil. 5. He sanctified them in truth. LESSON XXXVII i First Aorist Subjunctive Active and Middle Vocabulary 310. άνεμος, δ, Wind θαυμάζω, I wonder , marvel ίσχυρός, -ά, -ov, strong κρίμα, τό, judgment μισέω, I hate νικάω, I conquer νομίζω, I think , suppose χρεσβύτερος, δ, elder σκανδαλίζω, I cause to stum ble} offend φόβος, δ, fear χρεία, ή, need 126 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR 311. The first aorist subjunctive active and middle of λύω: Active Singular Plural I. λύσω I. λύσωμεν 2. λύσης 2. λύσητε 3· λύση 3· λύσωσι Middle I. λύσωμαι I. λυσώμεθα 2. λύση 2. λύσησθε 3· λύσηται 3· λύσωνται α. λύση, the second pers. sing, middle, came from λυσησαι; σ dropped out, and η and at contracted to η. 312. Observe: i. There is no augment. Augment belongs to the secondary tenses of the indicative only. 2. The stem λυσ(α) (σ(α) is the tense suffix) is che same stem as in the aorist indicative. 3. The long thematic vowel ω/η is added to the stem. Com¬ pare the present subjunctive 165 and 172. 4. The personal endings are the primary active and middle endings, the same as in the present subjunctive (165 and 172). 313. In the formation of the first aorist subjunctive of verbs with stems ending in a short vowel or a mute, the same changes are made at the end of the stem as in the first aorist indicative (see 303. 1, 3). Thus the first aorist subjunctive of οέγαχάω is αγαπήσω, άγαχήσης, etc. χοιέω is ποιήσω, χοιήσης, etc. χληρόω is πληρώσω, χληρώσης, etc. FIRST AORIST SUBJUNCTIVE 127 πέμπω is πέμψω, πέμψης, etc. άρχομαι 1S άρξωμαι, άρξη, etc. πείθω is πείσω, πείσης, etc. σώζω (σω δ-) is σώσω, σώσης, etc. 314. Write the first aorist subjunctive of αίτέω, I ask ; έρωτάω, I ask (question); φανερόω, I make manifest ; δέχομαι, I receive; γράφω, I write; βλέπω, I see; σώζω, I save. 315. Of course the “kind of action” of the aorist subjunctive is punctiliar; and Aktionsart is present as in the indicative. What was said in 304-306 about punctiliar action and Aktionsart applies to the aorist subjunctive. 316. It needs to be repeated that the difference in the meaning between the present subjunctive and the aorist subjunctive is in the “kind of action” expressed by the two tenses: durative action in the present, and punctiliar action in the aorist. 317. The aorist subjunctive (in the second and third persons) with μή is used to express a prohibi¬ tion. 1 . Generally in the second person : μή άρξησθε λέγει v, do not begin to say. 2. Less often in the third person: μή τις υμάς πλανήση, let no one cause you to err. 318. Exercises I. I. τινές δέ έξ αυτών άπήλθον πρδς τους Φαρισαίους καί είπαν αυτοΐς ά έποίησεν ’Ιησούς. 2. έτύφλωσεν αυτών 128 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR τους όφθαλμους Υνα μή ” δωσι τοΤς όφθαλμοΤς. 3* μή νομίσητε ότι ήλθον καταλύσαι τδν νόμον ή τους χροφήτας. ουτος ήλθε εις μαρτυρίαν Υνα μαρτυρήσγ) χερί τού φωτός Υνα χάντες (all) χιστεύσωσιν Sc’ αυτού. 5* ζητήσωμεν αυτόν. 6. μή χερί τούτων γράψης. II. ι. What shall we do? 2. Let us receive the Gospel. 3. Do not love the world. 4. They asked him concerning the parable. 5. If we do his will, he will love us. LESSON XXXVIII First Aorist Active and Middle Participle. Adjectives of the Third Declension. Declension of χάς 319. Vocabulary άδικος, -η, -ον, unrighteous αδύνατος, -ον, unable , impossible ακάθαρτος, -ον, unclean αμήν, adv., truly , verily άχας, άχασα, άχαν, all, altogether άχολύω, I release βφλίον, τό, book, a written document θεραχεύω, I heal δτε, relative temporal adv. with the indicative, when όταν, relative temporal adv. with the subj. and indica¬ tive, whenever , when χάς, χάσα, χάν, all, every 320. The first aorist active participle of λύω is λύσας (masc.), λύσασα (fern.), λΰσαν (neut.). FIRST AORIST PARTICIPLE 129 STEM λυσαντ- Singular Masc. Fern. Neut. Nom. λύσας λύσασα λΰσαν Gen. λύσαντος λυσάσης λύσαντος Abl. λύσαντος λυσάσης λύσαντος Loc. λύσαντι λυσάση λύσαντι Ins. λύσαντι λυσάση λύσαντι Dat. λύσαντι λυσάση λύσαντι Acc. λύσαντα λύσασαν λΰσαν Plural Nom. λύσαντες λύσασαι λύσαντα Gen. λυσάντων λυσασών λυσάντων Abl. λυσάντων λυσασών λυσάντων Loc. λύσασι λυσάσαις λύσασι Ins. λύσασι λυσάσαις λύσασι Dat. λύσασι λυσάσαις λύσασι Acc. λύσαντας λυσάσας λύσαντα a. All participles with masc. nom. in -ας are de¬ clined like λύσας, λύσασα, λΰσαν. 321. Observe: I. The aorist tense suffix σα appears throughout. 2. To the aorist theme is added the participial ending -ντ. 3* The stem is λυσαντ-; and (i) to this is added ς to form the nominative masc. sing. ; ντ cannot stand before ς and drops out, and a is lengthened; (2) the neuter nom. sing, is the mere stem, τ being dropped (234, 4) ; (3) the fern, nom. sing, λύσασα is from λυσανσα from λυσαντια (see 234, 3 footnote). 4. The masc. and neuter are declined according to the third declension, and the fern, is declined according to the first declension. 130 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR 322. The first aorist middle participle of λύω is λυσάμενος, λυσαμένη, λυσάμενον. Note the middle par¬ ticiple ending -μένος, -μενη, -μενον is added to the aorist theme λυσα-. The first aorist middle participle, like the present and second aorist middle participles, is declined like an adjective of the first and second declensions. 323. Of course the kind of action (punctiliar) and the Aktionsart of the verb-stem apply to the par¬ ticiple. 324. The declension of πας, πάσα, πάν is: Stem παντ- Singular Masc. Fem. Neut . Nom. πας πάσα πάν Gen. παντός πάσης παντός Abl. παντός πάσης παντός Loc. παντ( πάση παντ( Ins. παντι πάση παντί Dat. παντί πάση παντί Acc. πάντα πάσαν πάν Plural Nom. πάντες πάσαι πάντα Gen. πάντων πασών πάντων Abl. πάντων πασών πάντων Loc. πάσι πάσαις πάσι Ins. πάσι πάσαες πάσι Dat. πάσι πάσαες πάσι Acc. πάντας πάσας πάντα USES OF χάς 131 a. άχας is a strengthened form of χάς and except for the accent is declined like πας. 325. i. Note that except for the accent χάς is declined like the first aorist participle λύσας; and the formation of genders and cases is like λύσας. 2. Observe that the accent in the masculine and neuter singular is that of monosyllables of the third declension (226), while in the plural the accent is on the penult. 326. Examine carefully the following examples of the use of χάς : 1. In the predicate position: a. χάσα ή χόλις, all the city h. χάσαι at χόλεις, all cities 2. In the attributive position : a. ή χάσα χόλις, the city as a whole h. δ χάς νόμος, the entire law , the whole law c. ot χάντες ανδρες, the total number of the men 3. With a singular substantive, without the article; χάσα χόλις or χόλις χάσα, every city 4. χάς 0 and the participle is a common construc¬ tion in the New Testament. χάς ό άκούων, every one hearing , every one who hears χάντες οι άκούοντες, all those hearing , all those who hear χαντίτφ άκούοντι, to every one hearing , to every one who hears χάντες οι άκοόσαντες, all those having heard, all those who heard 132 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR 327. ώστε, so that (to be distinguished from ώστε used as an inferential conjunction, and so, therefore ) is used with the infinitive (twice with the indicative) to express result: καί έθεράχευσεν αυτόν ώστε τον τυφλόν βλέχειν, and he healed him so that the blind man was seeing. a. The accusative τόν τυφλόν is not the subject of the infinitive βλέχειν. The infinitive does not have a subject; it has no personal endings, and is not a finite verb. The acc. limits an idea in content, scope, and direction. The action in βλέχειν is limited by the acc. to τόν τυφλόν. This use of the acc. is generally called the acc. of general reference. 328. Exercises I. I. ό χέμψας με δίκαιός έστιν. 2. ταΰτα χάντα έλάλησεν ό ’Ιησούς έν χαραβολαϊς τοίς δχλοις. 3· πας ό έν αύτώ μενών ούχ αμαρτάνει, φ άκουσας ταύτα είχεν αυτω Τ ι τούτο ακούω χέρι σού ; 5· ήλθον χοιήσαι τό θέλημα τού χέμψαντός με. 6. δταν άκούσωσιν τόν λόγον, μετά χαράς λαμβάνουσιν αυτόν. J. αμήν αμήν λέγω υμΐν ότι ερχεται ώρα καί νύν έστιν δτε οί νεκροί άκουσουσιν τής φωνής τού υιού τού θεού καί οί άκούσαντες ζήσουσιν. II. ι. Having heard this he went away. 2. He healed all the blind so that they marvelled. 3. Every one believing on him comes not into judgment. 4. When you hear his voice, you will believe. 5. Let us hear him who sent him. ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION 133 LESSON XXXIX Adjectives of the Third Declension: Stems in -ες. Irregular Adjectives, πολύς and μέγας Vocabulary 329. αληθής, -ές, true ασθενής, -ές, weak , sick γάμος, δ, marriage μέγας, μεγάλη, μέγα, great μονογενής, -ές, only begotten πολύς, πολλή, πολύ, mucht many προσευχή, ή, prayer υπάγω, I go away , depart υγιής, -ές, whole , healthy 330. The declension of άληθής is: Stem άληθεσ- Singular Masc. and Fern. Neut. Nom. άληθής άληθές Gen. άληθοΰς άληθοΰς Abl. άληθοΰς άληθοΰς Loc. άληθεϊ άληθεϊ Ins. άληθεϊ άληθεϊ Dat. άληθεϊ άληθεϊ Acc. αληθή άληθές Plural Masc. and Fern. Neut. Nom. άληθεϊ ς αληθή Gen. άληθών άληθών Abl. άληθών άληθών Loc. άληθέσι άληθέσι Ins. άληθέσι άληθέσι Dat. άληθέσι άληθέσι Acc. άληθεϊς άληθή 134 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR There are about sixty adjectives in the New Testament declined like αληθής. Compare the declension of αληθής with γένος (290). 331. In the declension of αληθής observe: 1. The neuter nom. and acc. sing, is the mere stem. 2. The masc. nom. sing, is the stem with the stem vowel lengthened. 3. In the other cases σ of the stem drops out and the concurrent vowels contract. The gen. and abl. sing, αληθούς is from άληθέσος (ε + o= ου) ; the loc., ins., and dat. sing, άληθεϊ is from άληθέσι (ε + c = ει) ; the masc. acc. sing, αληθή is from άληθέσα (ε + α = η) ; the masc. nom. plur. αληθείς is from άληθέσες (ε + ε = ει) ; the neut. nom. and acc. plur. αληθή is from άληθέσα (ε + α = η) ; the gen. plural άληθών is from άληθέσων (ε + ω = ω) ; the masc. and fern. acc. plur. αληθείς is like the nom. (probably borrowed from the nom.). 4. The masc. and fern, forms are alike. (This is the first adjective given thus far, the feminine of which is declined in the third declen¬ sion.) 5. The gen., abl., loc., ins. and dat. in all three genders are alike. 332. The declension of χολυς is: Stems χολυ- and χολλο-, -α- Singular Masc . Fem. Neut. Nom. χολυς χολλή χολυ Gen. χολλο ΰ χολλής χολλο υ Abl. χολλο υ χολλής χολλο υ Loc. χολλώ χολλή χολλώ IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES 135 Masc. Fem. Neut. Ins. χολλώ s χολλη χολλώ Dat. χολλώ » χολλη χολλώ Acc. χολύν χολλήν χολύ Plural Nom. χολλοί χολλαί χολλά Gen. χολλών χολλών χολλών Abl. χολλών χολλών χολλών Loc. χολλοίς χολλαίς χολλοίς Ins. χολλοίς χολλαίς χολλοίς Dat. χολλοίς χολλαΐς χολλοίς Acc. χολλούς χολλάς χολλά Observe : ι. The masc. and neut. nom. and acc. sing, are made on the stem χολυ-. 2. Ail the other cases (masc. fern, and neut.) are made on the stem χολλο- (fern. end. -η) and declined according to the first and second declensions. 333. The declension of μέγας is: Stems μεγα- and μεγάλο-, · -a-. Singular Masc. Fem. Neut. Nom. μέγας μεγάλη μέγα Gen. μεγάλου μεγάλης μεγάλου Abl. . μεγάλου μεγάλης μεγάλου Loc. μεγάλφ μεγάλη μεγάλφ Ins. μεγάλφ μεγάλη μεγάλφ Dat. μεγάλω μεγάλη μεγάλφ Acc. μέγαν μεγάλην μέγα 136 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR Plural Masc. Fern. Neut. Nom. μεγάλοι μεγάλαι μεγάλα Gen. μεγάλων μεγάλων μεγάλων Abl. μεγάλων μεγάλων μεγάλων Loc. μεγάλοις μεγάλαις μεγάλοις Ins. μεγάλοις μεγάλαις μεγάλοις Dat. μεγάλοις μεγάλαις μεγάλοις Ace. μεγάλους μεγάλας μεγάλα Observe : ι. The masc. and neut. nom. and acc sing, are made on the short stem μεγα-. 2. All the other cases (masc., fern., and neut.) are made on the long stem μεγάλο- (fern. end. -η) and are declined like adjectives of the first and second declensions. 334. Study carefully the following examples of in¬ direct discourse: 1. Indirect assertions. I. After οτι {that): συ λέγεις δτι βασιλεύς ε?μι, thou sayest that I am a King, είδον ότι έσθίει, they saw that he was eating. 2. With the infinitive: λέγουσιν αυτόν μένειν, they say that he remains. 3. With the participle: ε’ίδαμέν τινα έκβάλλοντα δαιμόνια, we saw one casting out demons. II. Indirect questions: αύτός γάρ έγίνωσκεν τί ήν έν τω άνθρώπφ, for he himself knew what was in man. είδαν που μένει, they saw where he was abiding. ή ρώτησαν τι φάγωσι, they asked what they were to eat „ INDIRECT DISCOURSE 137 III. Indirect commands. τφ Παυλω ελεγον διά τοΰ πνεύματος μή έχιβαίνειν ε£ς Ιεροσόλυμα, they said to Paul through the spirit that he should not go up to Jerusalem (literally, not to go up to Jerusalem). 335. Observe: 1. Indirect assertions are expressed (i) by ότι and the indicative; (2) by the infinitive; (3) by the participle. 2. The same introductory words are generally used in indirect questions as those which are found in direct questions. 3. The infinitive is frequently used in indirect commands. a. Sometimes 7va and a finite mode is used.1 4. The tense generally remains unchanged in the Greek indirect discourse. a. Sometimes there is a change, as in the first example under II ; the imperfect ήν seems to represent a present in the direct. 5. The mode generally remains unchanged in the Greek indirect discourse. The subjunctive mode (φάγωσι) in the third example under II was in the direct. 6. The person of the verb is or is not changed according to the circumstances. In the third example under II the third person was first or second in the direct. 1 Also used as object-clause after verbs of striving, beseeching, etc. 138 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR 336. Exercises I. I. καί έγένετο φόβος μέγας έχΐ χάντας. 2. τις γάρ έστιν ανθρώπων δς ού γινώσκει την Έφεσιων 1 χόλιν νεωκόρον2 ουσαν τής μεγάλης Άρτέμιδος; 3· λέγουσιν άνάστασιν μή είναι. 4· πολύ πλήθος αχό τής Γαλιλαίας ήκολούθησεν αύτω. 5· είπεν δτι μεγάλη 'έστίν ή χίστις αύτοΰ. 6. ετι χολλά Ίχω υμίν λέγειν. J. μετά ταυτα ήκουσα ώς φωνήν μεγάλην όχλου χολλοΰ. 8. γινώσκομεν ότι άληθής εί. II. ι. They did not know what they would see. 2. They know that there shall be great tribulation. 3. Many saw the Lord coming and said that he was the Saviour of the world. 4. This one is the only begotten son. LESSON XL First Aorist Passive Indicative and Subjunctive. Future Passive Indicative 337. Vocabulary άναγινώσκω, I read λυχέω, I grieve άνωθεν, adv., from above, όχου, rel. adv., where again χόθεν, interrogative adv., aupiov, adv., tomorrow whence Ιγγός, adv., near σαλεύω, I shake επαύριον, adv., on the morrow σταυρόω, I crucify 338. The stem of first aorist passive is formed by adding θε directly to the verb-stem. Thus λυθε- is the first aorist stem of λύω. 1 Έφέσιος, -η, -ον, Ephesian. 2 νεωκόρος, δ or ή, temple-keeper FIRST AORIST PASSIVE 139 339. The first aorist passive indicative of λύω is: Singular Plural 1. έλύθην, I was loosed i. έλύθημεν, we were loosed 2. έλύθης, you were loosed 2. έλύθητε, you were loosed 3. έλύθη, he was loosed 3. έλύθησαν, they were loosed First aorist passive infinitive — λυθήναι, to be loosed Observe: 1. The vowel ε of the aorist passive tense suffix θε is lengthened to η (θη) throughout the indicative, and in the infinitive. 2. The personal endings of the aorist passive indicative are the secondary active personal endings (66). 3. The endings are added directly to the aorist passive stem. 4. In the indicative there is an augment as in the aorist active ind. (182, 3 and 296, 3), and is formed on the same principles as in the imperfect (70). 5. The aorist passive infinitive ending is -vat; the accent of the aorist passive infinitive is always on the penult. 340. The aorist passive subjunctive of λύω is: Singular 1. λυθώ 2. λυθής 3· λυθτί Plural 1. λυθώμεν 2. λυθήτε 3· λυθώσι Observe : 1 . The subjunctive has the primary per¬ sonal endings. 2. The subjunctive mode sign ω/η contracts with ε of the passive suffix. 3. The cir¬ cumflex accent is written over the contracted syllable. 4. The subjunctive does not have an augment. 341. Review the “kind of action” (punctiliar) of the aorist tense and Aktionsart of the verb-stem, 140 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR 178-180, 305-307. These of course apply to the aorist passive as well as to active and middle. 342. For the meaning of the passive voice see 51. Some defective (152) verbs have no aorist middle, but passive form; but not the passive meaning: the meaning is either middle or active (or intransitive) : χορεύομαι, I go; έχορεύθην, I went. Some verbs have both aorist middle and passive forms, as άχεκρινάμην, άχεκρίθην. 343. Verbs with stems ending in a short vowel (α, ε, o) generally lengthen (a to a after ε, t, or p) the vowel of the stem before the tense suffix θε in formation of the aorist passive. Thus: χοιέω; aorist passive, έχοιήθην. γεννάω; aorist passive, έγεννήθην. φανερόω; aorist passive, έφανερώθην. a. A few verbs like τελέω do not lengthen ε; but have σ before θε, as έτελέσθην. 344. The future passive is made upon the aorist passive stem. Thus λυθήσομαι, I shall he loosed , is the aorist passive stem λυθη + σο (the future tense suffix and thematic vowel) + μαι (the primary mid¬ dle ending). The future passive of λύω is: Singular Plural 1. λυθήσομαι, I shall he loosed 1. λυθησόμεθα, we shall he 2. λυθήση, you shall he 2. λυθήσεσθε loosed , etc. loosed 3· λιιθήσονται λυθήσεται he , she or it shall he loosed SECOND AORIST PASSIVE 141 Observe that the future passive is conjugated like the future middle except that the stem of the passive is λυθησ-, whereas the stem of the middle is λυσ-. 345. In some verbs (having no first aorist passive) there is found a second aorist passive with suffix -ε (-η) added directly to the verb-stem. The con¬ jugation is like that of the first aorist passive, except there is no Θ. Thus: the second aorist passive of γράφω is έγράφην,1 έγράφης, etc.: στρέφω, έστράφην, etc. Second aorist passive infinitive γραφήναι. The second future passive is built on the second aorist stem. The second future passive of φαίνω (second aor. pass., έφάνην) is φανήσομαι. 346. Exercises I. I. καί έξελθών έχορεύθη είς έτερον τόπον. 2. άμήν άμήν λέγω σοι, έάν μή τις γεννηθή άνωθεν, ου δύναται C δείν την βασιλείαν τού θεού. 3· τούτο έφανερώθη ό υιός τού 6εού ινα λύση τά έργα διαβόλου, φ λέγει αύτω Σίμων Πέτρος, Κύριε, πού υπάγεις; άπεκρ'θη ’Ιησούς ' Οπου υπάγω ού δύνασαί μοι νύν άκολουθήσαι. 5· ^Υϊύς ήν ό τόπος τής πόλεως όχου έσταυρώθη ό ’Ιησούς. II. ι. If he be made manifest, we shall be like (όμοιοι) him (associative-instrumental case). 2. Those who believed were begotten of (έκ) God. 3. It was written in order that the Scripture might be fulfilled. 4. The powers of the heavens shall be shaken. 1 The second aorist passive is really an active form that came to have a passive meaning. 142 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR LESSON XLI Aorist Passive (Continued) 347. Vocabulary αληθώς, adv., truly , surely καλώς, adv., finely, well άνοίγω, I open πειράζω, I test , tempt Biavota, ή, mind , under - πρό, prep, with abl., before standing τελειόω, I end , complete , έπιθυμία, ή, desire fulfill 348. The formation of the first aorist and future passive given in Lesson XL is typical of all verbs with stems ending in a vowel. 349. Verbs with stems ending in a mute (217-218) suffer euphonic changes in the mute before the pas¬ sive suffix θε. 1. A labial mute, πβφ, before Θ (of the suffix) be¬ comes φ. πέμπω, stem πεμπ-, aorist passive έπέμφθην. 2. A palatal mute, κγχ, before Θ, becomes χ. αγω, stem άγ-, aorist passive -ήχθην. 3. A lingual mute, τδθ, before θ becomes σ. πείθω, stem πειθ-, aorist passive έπείσθην. These changes may be represented to the eye in tabular form, thus: π, β, φ before θ = φθ. κ, γ, χ before θ = χθ. τ, δ, θ, before θ = σθ. After these changes are made the conjugation follows the form of έλύθην. Thus λείπω: Aorist passive indicative έλείφθην, etc. Aorist passive subjunctive λειφθώ, etc. Aorist passive infinitive λειφθήναι Future passive indicative λειφθήσομαι, etc. AORIST PASSIVE PARTICIPLE 143 350. The stem of the aorist passive participle is made on the aorist passive stem with the participial ending -ντ. The stem of the aorist passive participle of λύω is λύθεντ-. The declension of the aorist passive participle of λύω is: Singular • Masc. Fem. Neut. Nom. λυθείς λυθεϊσα λυθέν Gen. λυθέντος λυθείσης λυθέντος Abl. λυθέντος λυθείσης λυθέντος Loc. λυθέντι λυθείση λυθέντι Ins. λυθέντι λυθείση λυθέντι Dat. λυθέντι λυθείση λυθέντι Acc. λυθέντα λυθεϊσαν λυθέν Plural Nom. λυθέντες λυθεϊσαι λυθέντα Gen. λυθέντων λυθεισών λυθέντων Abl. λυθέντων λυθεισών λυθέντων Loc. λυθεϊσι λυθεισαις λυθεϊσι Ins. λυθεϊσι λυθείσαις λυθεϊσι Dat. λυθεϊσι λυθείσαις λυθεϊσι Acc. λυθέντας λυθείσας λυθέντα Observe : i :. The masc. nom. sing. is formed by adding -ς to the stem λυθεντ = λυθεντς; ντ cannot stand before ς and drops out; the ε is lengthened (compensatory) to ει. 2. The fem. nom. sing, is formed from λυθεντια = = λυθενσα = λυθεισα; ε is length- ened (compensatory) to ei; see 321,3 (3); 234,3 footnote. 3. The neut. nom. (and acc.) sing, is the 144 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR mere stem, without τ (see 234, 3). 4. For the forms of the masc. and neut. loc., ins., and dat. plural see 229, 2, and lengthening of ε to ει see above. 5. Note the position of the accent on the aorist passive par¬ ticiple in comparison with the other participles. 351. The aorist passive participle of χέμχω is χεμφθείς, -θεϊσα, -θέν. άγω is άχθείς, -θεϊσα, -θέν. χείθω is χεισθείς, -θεϊσα, -θέν. γεννάω is γεννηθείς, -θεϊσα, -θέν. φανερόω is φανερωθείς, -θεϊσα, -θέν. The second aorist passive participle of γράφω is γραφείς, -εϊσα, -έν. φαίνω is φανείς, -εϊσα, -έν. στρέφω is στραφείς, -εϊσα, -έν. 352. The aorist passive participle is used in all the participial constructions that have been studied. 353. It cannot certainly be told beforehand what form of the aorist passive a verb will have. The aorist passive stem must be known. 1. Some of the second aorist passives found in the New Testament (besides those already given) are: -έκόχην (fut. pass, κοχήσομαι), pres, κόχτω, I beat , strike pres, κρύχτω, I hide pres, σχείρω, I sow pres, (άχο)στέλλω, I send έκρύβην, έσχάρην, (άχ)έστάλην, ήνοίγην (fut. pass, άνοιχθήσομαι, άνοιγήσομαι), pres, ανοίγω, I open AORIST PASSIVE 145 2. Some verbs have apparently irregular forms in the first aorist and future passive : Present First aorist passive Future passive ακούω ήκούσθην άκουσθήσομαι βάλλω έβλήθην βληθήσομαι γινώσκω έγνώσθην γνωσθήσομαι εγείρω ήγέρθην έγερθήσομαι καλέω έκλήθην κληθήσομαι λαμβάνω έλήμφθην -λημφθήσομαί Stem όχ- ώφθην όφθήσομαι. (Presents used, βλέχω, όράω, and όχτάνομαι). 354. Exercises I. I. έκλήθηρ δ£ b J Ιησούς είς τον γάμον. 2. καί τη, τρίτη ήμερα έγερθήσεται. 3· δ δέ διεκώλυεν1 αυτόν λέγων Έγώ χρείαν έχω υχό σοϋ βαχτισθήν at. ουτος μέγας κληθήσεται εν τή βασιλεία τών ουρανών. 5· υμείς δέ τίνα με λέγετε είναι; άχοκριθείς ό Πέτρος λέγει αυτω Σό ει ό Χριστός. 6. χίστει Μωυσής γεννηθείς έκρύβη τρίμηνον (three months) υχό τών χατέρων αυτοΰ. 7· ήχθηό’Ιησους υχό τοΰ χνεύματος είς την έρημον χειρασθήναι ύχό τοΟ διαβόλου. 8. μετά ταΰτα ώφθη χάσι τοΐς άχοστόλοις. II. ι. The prince of this world will be cast out. 2. Let us be led by the spirit. 3. If I touch him, I shall be saved. 4. He who was begotten of God will keep you. 5. If we be raised from the dead, they shall be raised. 1 διακωλύω, I hinder. 146 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR LESSON XLII Some Irregular Substantives of the Third Declension. Some Uses of the Infinitive 355. Vocabulary αντί, prep, (original meaning “at ends” [face to face]) with the gen., opposite , against; instead of , in place of , for άξιος, -a, -ov, fitting, worthy έχιθυμέω, I desire νεφέλη, ή, cloud χάσχα, τό (indeclinable), the Passover χάσχω, I suffer ; second aorist εχαθον σίγάω, I am silent , keep silent συνεσθίω, I eat with (someone) φοβέομαι, I am afraid , I fear φωνέω, I call , speak aloud χρονίζω, I spend time , tarry 356. Learn the forms of the following irregular substantives of the third declension given in § 12: γόνυ, τό, knee ; γυνή, ή, woman; θρίξ, ή, hair; κυων, δ, dog; ους, τό, ear; ύδωρ, τό, water. Note especially the forms not in parentheses — the forms in parentheses do not occur in the New Testament. 357. The infinitive, as we have learned, has tense and voice ; but it has no manner of affirmation and is not a mode. There are a great many uses of the infinitive. Note carefully some of the uses of the infinitive in the following: I. As an indeclinable verbal substantive (of USES OF THE INFINITIVE 147 neuter gender) the infinitive may be used in any case (not vocative) with or without the article. With the article it is indeclinable; but the neuter article with the infinitive is declined and shows the case of the infinitive. (1) καλόν σοί έστιν εισελθεΐν εις ζωήν, it is good for thee to enter into life . εισελθεΐν is in the nominative case. (2) ήλθομεν προσκυνήσαι, we came to worship. χροσκυνήσαι is in the dative case. In this construc¬ tion the infinitive is common for the expression of purpose. (3) ^ζήτησαν τού' καταλΰσαι τα έργα αυτού, they sought to destroy his work, τού καταλΰσαι is in the genitive case, τού and the infinitive is common in the New Testament to express purpose. 2. The infinitive with the article is used in most of the constructions in which any other substantive is used. (1) The infinitive is used with such verbs as: δύναμαι, θέλω, ζητέω, αρχομαι, etc. In fact, the infinitive can be used with almost any verb that can be used with a substantive. θέλει άκούειν τό εύαγγέλιον, he wishes to hear the gospel. ού δύναται αύτω δουλεύειν, he is not able to serve him. (2) The infinitive is used with substantives, most frequently with those expressing time, fitness, ability, need, etc. έχομεν έξουσίαν γενέσθαι τα τέκνα τού θεού, we have power to become the children of God. εχει χίστιν τού σωθήναι, he has faith to be healed {saved). 148 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR (3) The infinitive is used with adjectives, com- monly with άξιος, δυνατός, Ικανός. ούκέτι είμί άξιος κληθήναι υιός σου, / am no longer worthy to be called a son of thine. δυνατός έστιν αυτό φυλάξαι, he is able to guard {keep) it. (4) The infinitive with the article is used with many prepositions. πρό τοΰ σε Φίλιππον φωνήσαι είδόν σε, before Philip called thee , I saw thee. είπεν παραβολήν διά τό έγγύς είναι Ιερουσαλήμ αυτόν, he spoke a parable because he was near Jerusalem. μετά τό άποθανείν αυτόν άπήλθον, after he died , they went away. ταυτα ειπον ύμΐν είς τό μή μένειν υμάς έν τή αμαρτία, I said this to you in order that you might not remain in sin. Note: είς τό and an infinitive is a common con¬ struction to express purpose. καί έθαύμαζον έν τώ χρονίζειν έν τώ ναώ αυτόν, and they marvelled while he was tarrying in the temple. a. Observe that the case of the infinitive has its proper meaning. The prepositions, as with cases of other substantives, help out the meaning of the cases. What the resultant meaning is depends on the meaning of the word, the case with the preposi¬ tion, and the context. In the first example the resultant meaning of προ τοΰ φωνήσαι (abl. case) is temporal; of the second example, διά τό είναι, causal; of the third, μετά τό άποθανείν, temporal; of the fourth, είς τό μή μένειν, purpose; of the fifth, PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT 149 έν τώ χρονίζειν (loc. case), temporal, b. The voices of the infinitive have the usual significance, c. The tenses have their force in the infinitive, as in the modes and participle. Tense in the infinitive has no time except in indirect discourse, d. It is not neces¬ sary for the article to come next to the infinitive. Several words may intervene (see first example under (4) ) and the clause may be one of considerable extent, e. The infinitive is not a mode and is not limited by personal endings; and, therefore, does not have a subject. See 327, a. 358. Exercises I. I. xpo γάρ του έλθεΐν τινάς άχδ Ιακώβου μετά τών έθνών συνήσθίεν δ Πέτρος. 2. ουκ έστιν καλόν λαβείν τόν άρτον τών τέκνων καί βαλεΐν τοΐς κυσίν. 3· μετά δέ τδ σιγήσαι αυτούς άχεκρίθη Ιάκωβος. έχεΟύμησα τούτο τδ χάσχα φαγείν μεθ’ υμών χρδ τού με χαθεϊν. 5· εφοβήθησαν δέ έν τώ είσελθεΐν αυτους ε!ς την νεφέλην. II. ι. After he entered the house, the crowd went away. 2. While the woman was going away, he spoke to his disciples. 3. The son of man has power to save men. 4. He was worthy to receive the glory. 5. Before he saw you I called you. LESSON XLIII The Perfect and Pluperfect Indicative Active 859. Vocabulary άχαγγέλλω, I announce , de- σύρω, I drag , draw dare ψεύστης, -ου, δ, liar 150 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR έξω, adv., without ; used also φεύγω, I flee, take flight; with abl. second aorist, μακάριος, -a,- ov, blessed, happy εφυγον. όράω, I see; fut. δψομαι; second aor. είδον. 360. The perfect indicative active of λύω is: Singular Plural 1. λέλυκα, I have loosed, I. λελύκαμεν 2. λέλυκας etc. 2. λελύκατε 3· λέλυκε 3· λελύκασι or λέλυκαν Perfect active infinitive, λελυκέναι a. In the second pers. sing, a form like λέλυκες occurs a few times, b. In the third pers. plur. a form like λέλυκαν occurs ten times in the New Testament. 361. Observe: I. To the verb-stem (λ u-) is prefixed its initial consonant (λ) with ε. This is called reduplication. 2. The suffix -κα is added to the reduplicated verb-stem: thus is formed, in the in¬ dicative, the first (or κ) perfect stem (active). 3. The personal endings seem to be the secondary personal endings, except -ασι in the third plur. 362. The first (or κ) perfect (active) is generally formed from verb -stems ending in a vowel, a liquid (λ, p), or a lingual (dental) mute (τ, δ, θ). i. Vowel stems. If the final vowel of the stem is long (or a diphthong) -κα is added to the redupli¬ cated verb-stem without change, as χεχίστευκα. If the final vowel of the stem is short, it is length¬ ened before -κα as νικάω, I conquer, νενίκηκα; χοιέω* I do, χεχοίηκα; χληρόω, χεχλήρωκα. Here α, ε, and ο follow the same principle of length- SECOND PERFECT INDICATIVE 151 ening as in the future and first aorist active and passive. 2. Liquid stems, -κα is added to the reduplicated verb-stem, as στέλλω (σταλ-), εσταλκα (for redupli¬ cation see below). 3. Lingual mute stems, τ, δ, or Θ is dropped before -κα, as σώζω (σωδ), σέσωκα. 363. Verbs beginning with a vowel, two consonants (except a mute and liquid), a double consonant (ζ, ξ, ψ), or p, form the reduplication like the aug¬ ment. p is generally doubled. Thus: άγαχάω, ήγάχηκα; στέλλω, εσταλκα; ξηραίνω, έξήραμμαι. 364. Verbs beginning with a rough mute (φ, χ, Θ) have the corresponding smooth mute (x, κ, τ), in re¬ duplication. Thus: φιλέω, χεφίληκα; -θνήσκω, τέθνηκα. 365. A few verbs have a seemingly irregular perfect, as γινώσκω, perf. act. έγνωκα. δράω, perf. act. έώρακα. 366. In formation of the perfect active a few verbs add -a and not -κα to the reduplicated verb-stem. These are called second or strong perfects, and are older than the κ- perfects. Conj. like κ- perf. Present Second perfect άκούω άκήκοα γίνομαι γέγονα γράφω γέγραφα έρχομαι έλήλυθα χάσχω χέχονθα χείθω χέχοιθα φεύγω χέφευγα. I 1 52 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR 367. The tense in Greek called perfect is really a present perfect. The perfect presents the action of the verb in a completed state or condition. When the action was completed the perfect tense does not tell. It is still complete at the time of the use of the tense by the speaker or writer. The perfect expresses the continuance of completed action. It is then a combination of punctiliar action and dura- tive action. This kind of action expressed by the perfect tense is sometimes called perfective action. 368. The perfect tense as tense is timeless. But in the indicative the time element is present. The per¬ fect indicative generally expresses the present result of a past action. It then has to do with the past and the present. The English perfect is not an equiva¬ lent to the Greek perfect. The translations given in the paradigms are not at all to be taken as equiva¬ lent to the Greek perfect, but as a means of asso¬ ciating the verb meaning with the verb. Aktionsart of the verb applies to the perfect. E.g., γέγραφα, I wrote and the statement is still on record. έλήλυθα, I came (punctiliar) and am still here (dura- tive) . 369. The pluperfect (past perfect) indicative active of λύω is Singular Plural 1. [(έ)λελύκειν], I had loosedy I. [(έ)λελυκειμ,εν] 2. [(έ)λελύκεις] etc. 2. (έ)λελύκειτε 3. (έ)λελύκεε, 3· (έ)λελυκεεσαν a. The forms in brackets do not occur in the New Testament. PLUPERFECT INDICATIVE 153 Observe: I. The pluperf. is made upon the per¬ fect stem. 2. The thematic vowel is si. 3. The personal endings are the secondary personal end¬ ings. 4. There is an augment before the reduplica¬ tion. The augment is usually dropped in the plu¬ perf. in the New Testament. 370. If a second perfect has a pluperfect, the plu¬ perf. is made on the second perfect stem and is called the second pluperfect. Thus: Second pluperf. Present Second perf. (third pers. sing.) γίνομαι γέγονα (έ)γεγόνει έρχομαι έλήλυθα έληλύθει The pluperfect expresses continuance of the com¬ pleted state in past time up to a prescribed limit in the past. 371. Exercises I. I. δ έωράκαμεν καί άκηκόαμεν άχαγγέλλομεν καί ύμίν. 2. έν τουτω έστίν ή αγάπη, ούχ ότι ημείς ήγαχήκαμεν τον θεόν, άλλ’ οτι αυτός ήγάχησεν ημάς. 3· λέγει αυτω ’Ιησούς νΟτι έώρακάς με χεχίστευκας, μακάριοι οί μή ίδόντες καί χιστευσαντες. \. ψεύστην χεχοίηκε αυτόν ότι ού χεχίστευκεν εις τήν μαρτυρίαν ήν μεμαρτύρηκεν ό θεός περί τού υιού αυτού. 5· αύτη δε έστιν ή κρίσις ότι τό φως έλήλυθεν εις τον κόσμον. , 6. τόν Παύλον έσυρον έξω τής χόλεως, νομίζοντες αυτόν τεθνηκέναι. II. ι. We have made him King. 2. He said “What I have written, I have written.” 3. We have kept the faith. 4. I have come to do the will of him who sent me. 154 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR LESSON XLIV The Perfect Tense (Continued) 372. Vocabulary εορτή, ή, feast ήλιος, 6, sun θεραπεύω, I heal έμός, -ή, -όν, poss. pron. of first pers. my , mine σός,- ή,- όν, poss. pron. of the second pers., thy , thine ήμέτερος, -a, -ov, pOSS. pron. of the first pers., our ύμέτερος, -a, -ov, poss. pron. of the second pers., your 373. The declension of the perfect active participle of λύω is Nom. Gen.l Abl. Loc. Ins. Dat. Acc. Nom. Gen. 1 Abl. J Loc. 1 Ins. Dat. J Acc. Singular Masc. Fern. Neut. λελυκώς λελυκυϊα λελυκός λελυκότος λελυκυίας λελυκότος λελυκότι λελυκυίςι λελυκότι λελυκότα λελυκυΐαν λελυκός Plural λελυκότες λελυκυίαι λελυκότα λελυκότων λελυκυιών λελυκότων λελυκόσι λελυκυίαις λελυκόσι λελυκότας λελυκυίας λελυκότα PERFECT MIDDLE 155 Observe: I. The perfect act. part, is made on the perfect act. stem. 2. In the masc. and neut. it is declined according to the third declension, and in the fern, according to the first declension. 3. The accent seemingly is irregular. 374. The second perfect act. part, is made on the second perfect act. stem, and is commonly declined like λελυκώς, -κυΐα, -κός. Thus, Present Second perf. Second perf. part. λαμβάνω εϊληφα είληφώς, -φυΐα,-φός 376. The perfect indicative middle and passive λυω is: Singular Plural I. λέλυμαί I. λελυμεθα 2. λέλυσαι 2. λέλυσθε 3. λέλυταε 3. λέλυνται Perf. midd. and pass, infinitive, λελυσθαι Observe: 1. The stem of the perf. middle and pass, is the reduplicated verb-stem. 2. The primary middle personal endings are attached directly to the reduplicated verb-stem. 3. There is no the¬ matic vowel. a. The translations I have loosed (for) myself (midd.) and I have been loosed (pass.) do not give accurately the meaning of the perfect tense in Greek. 376. Verbs with stems in a short vowel (α, ε, o) lengthen the vowel (as in the fut., aor., etc.) before the personal endings, as, τληρόω, χεχλή ρωμαι ; θεάομαι, τεθέαμαι. 156 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR 377. Of verbs with stems in a labial mute (x, β, φ), a palatal mute (κ, γ, χ), a liquid (λ, p), or a nasal (μ, v), the third pers. sing, only of the perf. middle and passive occurs in the New Testament. Of verbs with stems in a lingual mute (τ, δ, Θ) the first and third pers. sing, and the first pers. plur. occur in the New Testament. See p. 240, § 31. 378. The pluperfect indicative middle (and passive) is formed by adding the secondary middle endings to the perfect middle stem. Sometimes there is also an augment. The pluperf. indie, middle third pers. plur. of λύω is (έ)λέλυντο. The pluperfect indie, middle (and passive) of verbs with stems in a con¬ sonant is so rare that the forms are not given here. 379. The perfect middle (and passive) participle is formed by adding the middle participle endings, -μένος, -μένη, -μένον, to the perfect middle stem. Thus the perfect middle (and passive) participle of λύω is: Masc. Fem. Neut. λελυμένος λελυμένη λελυμένον With the exception of the accent, it is declined like other participles in μένος, -η, -ον. 380. It needs to be remembered that perfective action runs through the whole perfect tense, and that Aktionsart of the verb-stem modifies the tense action. The perf. participle, then, may represent a state or a completed action. The time of the perf. part, is relative to the time of the principal verb. The action of the participle may be: CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 157 1. Coincident with that of the principal verb; e.g., είδον η δη αύτδν τεθνηκότα, they saw that he was already dead. 2. Antecedent to that of the principal verb; e.g., πολλοί τών χεχιστευκότων ήρχοντο, many of those having believed were coming. The perf. part, may be used in any of the con¬ structions in which other participles are used. 381. The second class conditional sentence. It is the condition determined as unfulfilled. The con¬ dition is assumed to be contrary to fact. The thing in itself may be true, but it is treated as untrue. The condition has only to do with the statement , not with the actual fact. The condition has ει -j- a past tense of the indicative; the conclusion has a past tense of the indicative usually with άν. αν cannot be really translated into English. It seems to have a definite sense, in that case , and an indefinite sense. It is a particle used to give more color to the mode with which it occurs. 1. The imperf. ind. is used in unfulfilled condi¬ tions about present time; e.g., εί ήν δ προφήτης, έγινωσκεν αν, if he were the prophet , he woidd know. 2. The aorist ind. or pluperf. ind. is used in un¬ fulfilled conditions about past time; e.g., ei γάρ εγνιοσαν, οόκ αν τον κύριον τής δόξης έσταύρωσαν, for if they had known , they would not have crucified the Lord of glory. a. Sometimes one tense occurs in one clause, 158 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR another tense in the other clause, b. Each tense has its proper kind of action, c. The negative with the protasis (if-clause) is μή, with the apodosis ού. 382. Exercises I. I. όπεκρίθη δ ’Ιησούς ’Αμήν αμήν λέγω σοι, έάν μή τις γεννηθή έξ υδατος καί πνεύματος, ου δύναται είσελθεΐν είς τήν βασιλείαν τού θεού, τδ γεγεννημένον έκ τής σαρκδς σαρξ έστιν, καί τδ γεγεννημένον έκ τού πνεύματος πνεύμα έστιν. 2. έν τούτψ ή οιγάπη τού θεού τετελείωται. 3· ήμών έξήλθαν, άλλ’ ούκ ήσαν έξ ήμών. εί γάρ έξ ήμών ήσαν, μεμενήκεισαν αν μεθ’ ήμών. φ γέγραπται έν τώ νόμω καί τοΐς προφήταις. 5· ήμεΐζ δέ κηρύσσομεν Χριστδν έσταυρωμένον. II. ι. If we had seen him, we would have loved him. 2. The days have been fulfilled. 3. We receive those who have believed on the Lord. LESSON XLV Reflexive Pronoun. Reciprocal Pronoun. Indefinite Relative Pronoun 383. Vocabulary έλπίζω, I hope b πλησίον, neighbor μυστήριον, τό, mystery ταπεινόω, I make low , πλησίον, adv., near humble 384. The reflexive pronouns are: έμαυτοΰ, -ής, myself σεαυτού, -ής, thyself έαυτού, -ής, -ού (rarely αυτού, -ής, -ού), himself , herself , itself REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS 159 They are declined as follows: I. First person: Singular Plural Gen. Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem . Abl. Loc. - έμαυτου έμαυτής έαυτών έαυτών Ins. Dat. * έμαυτφ έμαυτγ) έαυτοΐς έαυταΐς Acc. έμαυτόν έμαυτήν έαυτούς έαυτάς 2. Second person: Singular Plural Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem. Gen. ] Abl. Loc. *σεαυτου σεαυτής εαυτών έαυτών Ins. Dat. , "σεαυτφ σεαυτ-fi έαυτοΐς έαυταΐς Acc. σεαυτόν σεαυτήν έαυτούς έαυτάς 3. Third person: Singular Masc. Fem. Neut. Gen. ] Abl. j Loc. *έαυτου έαυτής έαυτου Ins. 'έαυτφ έαυτη έαυτφ Dat. „ Acc. έαυτόν έαυτήν έαυτό 160 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR Masc. Plural Fern. Neut. Gen. Abl. "εαυτών εαυτών έαυτών Loc. Ins. "έαυτοϊς έαυταΐς έαυτοϊς Dat. Acc. έαυτοός έαυτάς έαυτά Observe: I. These pronouns occur in the oblique cases only. 2. They are formed from the personal pronouns plus αυτός. 3. There is no neuter gender in the reflexive pronouns of the first and second persons. 4. The plural form is the same for all three persons. 385. Examine carefully the following examples of the use of the reflexive pronouns. 1. έγώ δοξάζω έμαυτόν, I glorify myself. 2. έχει ζωήν εν έαυτώ, he has life in himself. 3. τί λέγεις περί σεαυτοΰ; what dost thou say concerning thyself? 4. αυτοί έν έαυτοϊς στενάζομεν,Τ^ ourselves groan Within ourselves. In these examples it is seen that the pronoun refers back to the subject of the clause, hence the name reflexive. 386. The reciprocal pronoun is άλλήλων, of one another. It occurs in the New Testament only in the masculine forms άλλήλων, άλλήλοις, άλλήλους. No fern, and neut. forms occur. έλεγον πρός άλλήλους, they said to one another . INDEFINITE RELATIVE 161 387. οίδα, I know , an old perfect with a present (durative) meaning is conjugated in the indicative active as follows: Singular Plural 1. οίδα, I know, I. οί'δαμεν 2. οιδας etc. 2. οίδατε 3· οι δε 3· ο’ίδασι Infinitive, είδέναι 388. The forms of the (indefinite) relative pronoun δστις, ητις, δτι, given below are the forms found in the New Testament. Singular Masc. Fem. Neut. Nom. δστις ήτις δτι Acc. Plural δτι Nom. οίτινες αίτινες άτινα a. An old form δτου (gen.) is found in certain set phrases. This pronoun is made from the relative δς and the indefinite τις. It is used with the meanings “anyone” (indefinite) and “ somebody ” in particular (definite), i.e., “whoever” (indef.) and “who” (def.). 389. Exercises I. I. έμέ οίδατε καί οίδατε χόθεν είμί. καί αχ’ έμαυτου ούκ έλήλυθα, άλλ’ εστιν αληθινός ό χέμψας με, δν υμείς ούκ οίδατε. 2. καί υχέρ αυτών έγώ αγιάζω έμαυτόν. 3· αγαπήσεις τόν πλησίον σου ώς σεαυτόν. οστις ουν ταπεινώσει έαυτόν ώς τό χαιδίον τούτο, ουτός έστιν ό μείζων (greatest) έν τη βασιλείς των ουρανών. 5· °ΰ Υ^ρ εαυτούς 162 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR κηρύσσομεν άλλα Χριστόν ΊησοΟν Κύριον, έαυτούς δέ δούλους υμών διά ΊησοΟν. 6. καί χολλοί μισήσουσιν άλλήλους. II. ι. You shall love one another. 2. I have not spoken concerning myself. 3. We preached not our¬ selves, but Christ. 4. They said that he made him¬ self the son of God. LESSON XL VI Future and Aorist Active and Middle of Liquid Verbs 390. Vocabulary άχοκτείνω, I kill , slay χρόβατον, τό, sheep έκτείνω, I stretch out σωτηρία, ή, salvation κράβαττος, ό, pallet} bed δφείλω, I owe , ought ; (sec. aorist without augment, δφελον) 391. Verbs with stems in a liquid (λ, v, p) form the futures by adding -ε ο/ε1 the stem. The ε of the suffix contracts with the thematic vowel o/e. (Re¬ member that the present stem is not always the same as the verb-stem.) 392. The conjugation of κρίνω in the future indica¬ tive is: Singular 1. κρίνω (κρινέω) 2. κρίνεις (κρινέεις) 3· κρίνει (κρινέει) Active Plural 1. κρινουμεν (κρινέομεν) 2. κρινεΐτε (κρινέετε) 3· κρινούσι (κρινέουσι) 1 Originally -εσ°/ε. σ was expelled. f FUTURE OF LIQUID VERBS 163 Middle Singular Plural 1. χρινουμοκ (κρίνέομαι) 2. κρ ινη (κρ^νέγ)) 3· κρινεΐται (κρινέεται) 1. κρίνο υμεθα (κρινεόμεθα) 2. κρινεΐσθε (κρενέεσθε) 3· κρινουνταε (κρινέονται) Observe that when one of the uncontracted sylla¬ bles has an accent the contracted form has an accent (the circumflex, if possible). a. The uncontracted forms do not occur. They are given to exhibit the vowels that are con¬ tracted. b. Table of the vowel contractions. ε + ο = ου ε + ου = ου ε + ω = ω ε + ει = ει ε + ε + ει 393. Verbs with stems in a liquid form the aorist active and middle by lengthening the stem vowel and adding -a.1 a of the stem is lengthened to η (but ά before p), s to ει, X to i and ΰ to ΰ. The conjugation through all the modes, infinitives, and participles is like the regular first aorist; thus the aor. ind. act. of μένω is εμεινα, etc. ; the subj., μείνω, etc.; infinitive, μεΐναι part., μείνας. The aor. ind. middle of κρίνω is έκρινάμην, etc. Notice that these verbs have no σ in the aorist. 394. Liquid verbs may have a second aorist, as βάλλω (βαλ-), εβαλον. 1 Originally σ was expelled after a liquid. 164 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR 395. Learn the stem, the future, and aorist of the following verbs : Present Stem Future Aorist act αγγέλλω άγγελ- άγγελώ ήγγειλα a? ρω άρ- άρώ ήρα άχοκτείνω (άχο)κτεν- άχοκτενώ άχέκτεινα άχοστέλλω (άχο)στελ- άχοστελώ άχέστειλα βάλλω βαλ- βαλώ εβαλον έγειρω έγερ- έγερώ ήγειρα Of course the.compound forms of these verbs form their tenses in the same way as the uncompounded forms, as έχαγγέλλω, έχαγγελώ, έχήγγειλα άχοκτείνω and άχοστέλλω are compound verbs. 396. The tenses of the verb in Greek are divided into nine tense-systems. As we have seen each tense-system has a distinct stem, called tense-stem. Systems Tenses I. Present, including present and imperfect in all voices. future active and middle, first aorist act. and middle (and liquid aorists also), second aorist act. and middle. first perfect and pluperf. active. second perfect and pluperf. active. 2. Future, 3. First aorist, 4. Second aorist, 5. First perfect, 6. Second perfect, < < (< u n u TENSE-SYSTEMS 165 7. Perfect middle, including perfect and pluperf. middle and passive (and future perfect). 8. First passive, “ first aorist and future passive. 9. Second passive, “ second aorist and future passive. a. Most verbs have only six of these nine systems, since very few verbs have both the first and second forms of the same tense; many verbs have less than six. No verb occurring in the New Testament is used in all nine systems. 397. The principal parts of a Greek verb are the first person singular indicative of every system used in it; e.g., λύω, λύσω, έλυσα, λέλυκα, λέλυμαι, έλύθην. βάλλω, βαλώ, έβαλον, βέβληκα, βέβλημαι, έβλήθην. γίνομαι, γενήσομαι, έγενόμην, γέγονα, γεγένημαι, έγενήθην. To know a verb one must know its principal parts. 398. Exercises I. I. καθώςέμέ άχέστειλας εις τον κόσμον, κάγώ1 άχέστειλα αυτούς εις τον κόσμον, καί ύχέρ αυτών έγώ αγιάζω έμαυτόν, ?να καί αυτοί ώσιν ηγιασμένοι έν άληθεία. 2. δ έγείρας τον Τησοΰν καί ημάς συν ’Ιησού2 έγερεϊ. 3· άχοκτενούσιν αυτόν, καί τη τρίτη ημέρα έγερθήσεται. έν ύμίν μείνη δ άχ’ άρχής ήκούσατε, καί3 υμείς έν τφ υίφ καί3 έν τφ χατρί μενεΐτε. 5· ή?2 τ^ν κράβαττον αύτοΰ. 6. έξήλθεν δ σχείρων τού σχείραι. 1 κάγώ = καί έγώ, see § 4· 2 Associative-ins. case. 3 See καί . . . καί in 415° 166 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR II. i. They sought to kill him. 2. The disciples sowed the word. 3. I will send unto them prophets and apostles. 4. If we remain in the truth, the truth will remain in us. LESSON XL VII The Imperative Mode 399. Vocabulary άρχομαι, I begin νηστεύω, I fast ναός, δ, temple υποκριτής-, -ου, δ, pretender , hypocrite 400. The imperative is comparatively a late develop¬ ment in Greek. More of its forms came from an old injunctive mode than from any other source. 401. The personal endings of the imperative are: Active Singular . Plural 2. — , -θι, -ς -τε 3. -τω. -τωσαν. Middle (and Passive) 2. -σο -σθε 3· -σθω -σθωσαν. α. -θι (probably an old adverb) is found in a few old verbs, and, except in the aor. pass., is not used in the active forms of the imperative of most verbs. The ending -ς is found only in a few old verbs. b. -τω is probably an old ablative form of a demon¬ strative pronoun. IMPERATIVE MODE 167 402. The present imperative active, middle, and passive is made on the present tense-stem. See 396. 403. The present active imperative of λύω is: Singular Plural 2. λΟε, loose (thou) 2. λύετε, loose (ye) 3. λυέτω, let him loose 3. λυέτωσαν, let them loose a. λύε is the verb-stem with the thematic vowel e. Note the thematic vowel ε in all persons. 404. The present middle imperative of λύω is: Singular Plural 2. λύου, loose (for) thyself 2. λύεσθε, loose (for) your¬ self 3. λυέσθω, let him loose 3. λυέσθωσαν, let them loose (for) himself (for) themselves a. λύου is for λύεσο, σ is expelled, and ε and 0 contract to ou. 405. The present passive imperative of λύω is: Singular Plural 2. λύου, be (thou) loosed 2. λύεσθε, be (ye) loosed 3. λυέσθω, let him be loosed 3. λυέσθωσαν, let them be loosed Observe that the pres, passive imperative is like the pres, middle in form. 406. The second aorist active imperative of βάλλω is: Singular Plural 2. βάλε 2. βάλετε 3. βαλέτω 3· βαλέτωσαν 168 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR a. The second pers. sing, of some second aorists is accented on the ultima, as elx έ, έλθ'έ, ευ ps ; accent of imps, recessive, b. No augment. Plural 2. βάλεσθε 3. βαλέσθωσαν Singular 2. βαλοΰ 3· βαλέσθω a. Note the accent of βαλοΰ. Observe that in the endings the imperative of the second aor. act. and middle is like that of the present act. and middle. The difference between them is the difference in tense-stem: the present tense- stem is βαλλ-, the second aorist tense-stem is βαλ-. 408. The imperative, like the subjunctive, is always future in time, though it may apply to the immediate future. The difference in meaning between the present imperative and the aorist imperative is in the kind of action , — durative action in the present, and punctiliar action in the aorist. The pres, imperative, then, has to do with action in progress. The aorist imperative has to do with the simple act without regard to progress. E.g., βάλλε λίθους, keep on (or go on) throwing stones. μή βάλλε, stop (or quit) throwing stones. εισελθε είς τον οίκον, enter the house. μή είσέλθης εις τον οίκον, do not (do not begin to) enter the house. It will be observed that the first and second exam¬ ples (present) have reference to the continuance of IMPERATIVE MODE 169 the action, while the third and fourth examples (aorist) have reference to the simple act. In the second example μή with the pres, imperative forbids the continuance of the action; while in the fourth example μή with the aor. subjunctive forbids the beginning (ingressive) of the action. In the second example the action is going on; in the fourth example the action has not begun. Thus Aktionsart must be considered. In prohibitions to forbid a thing not yet done the aor. subj. (not the imperative) is used with μή (see fourth example above) . 409. The first aorist act. imperative of λύω is: Singular Plural 2. λύσον 2. λύσατε 3. λυσάτω 3· λυσάτωσαν a. The origin of -ον of the second pers. sing, is obscure. Observe that the stem is the aorist stem λυσα-. 410. The first aorist middle imperative of λύω is: Singular Plural 2. λΰσαί 2. λύσασθε 3. λυσάσθω 3· λυσάσθωσαν a. The second pers. sing, ending -at probably came from the aorist infinitive. Note accent, βάπτισαι. 411. The aorist passive imperative of λύω is: Singular Plural 2. λύθητί, be ( thou ) loosed, 2. λύθητε 3· λυθήτω etc. 3· λυΟήτωσαν a. -τι of the second pers. sing, was -0t. Θ was changed to τ to avoid the repetition of the rough mute. 170 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR Observe that the forms are made on the aor. pass. Stem λυθε(η). 412. In the imperative in Greek there is no first person form. In the first person the subjunctive is used instead of the imperative. 413. The original significance of the imperative was demand or exhortation; but it was not confined to this idea. The imperative is used in : 1. Commands or exhortations — άκουέτω, let him hear. ε’ίσελθε είς τδν οίκον, enter the house. 2. Prohibitions — μή κρίνετε quit {don't go on) judging 3. Entreaties — πάτερ άγιε, τή ρήσον αύτους έν τώ όνόματί σου, Holy Father , keep them in thy name. Note. — The negative of the imperative is μή. 414. Exercises I. I. μή κρίνετε Υνα μή κριθήτε. 2. άγιασθήτω τδ ονομά σου, έλθάτω ή βασιλεία σου, γενηθήτω το θέλημά σου, ώς έν ουρανώ καί έπί γης. 3· ^ταν δέ νηστεύητε, μή γίνεσθε ώς οί υποκριταί σκυθρωποί.1 φ ο εχων ώτα άκουειν άκουέτω. 5· πορεύθητι πρ6ς τον λαόν τούτον. 6. άρθητι καί βλήθητι είς τήν θάλασσαν. 7· ^«έγει αυτώ Έρχου καί ιδε. II. ι. Let him depart. 2. Guard thyself from the evil one. 3. Say to this people all the words of this life. 4. Quit saying evil things. 1 σκυθρωχός, adj., of a gloomy countenance. NUMERALS 171 LESSON XL VIII Numerals, ουδείς 415. Vocabulary διψάω, I thirst πάλιν, adv., again καί . . . καί, both — and πεινάω, I hunger , am hun - μήτε . . . μήτε, neither — nor gry ούκέτι, no longer , no more πώποτε, ever yet οϋτε. . .ούτε, neither — nor τέ. . . καί, both — and 416. Learn the numerals (cardinal and ordinal) from one (first) to twelve (twelfth). Cardinals Ordinals 1. είς, one , etc. πρώτος, first, etc. 2. δύο δεύτερος 3· τρεις τρίτος 4· τέσσαρες τέταρτος 5· πέντε πέμπτος 6. εξ έκτος 7· επτά έβδομος 8. δκτώ ογδοος 9. έννέα ένατος ΙΟ. δέκα δέκατος II. εν δέκα ενδέκατος 12. δώδεκα δωδέκατος δεκαδύο Other numerals may be learned from a lexicon as they are needed. 417. The ordinals have the regular terminations of adjectives of the first and second declensions, as BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR 172 τρίτος (masc.), τρίτη (fern.), τρίτον (neut.), and are so declined. 418. The cardinals are indeclinable, except the first four and from 200 onward. The first four are declined as follows: I. είς, μία, Masc., εν, one Fem. Neut. 2. δυο, two Masc., Fem., and Neut . Nom. είς μία V εν Nom. δυο Gen. ] Abl. - ενός μιας ενός Gen. Abl. - δύο Loc. Ins. ” ένί μια ένί Loc. Ins. - δυσί Dat. J Ace. ενα μίαν έν Dat. „ Ace. δύο. 3. τρεις, τρία, three 4. τέσσαρες, τέσσαρα, four Masc. and Fem. Neut. Masc. and Fem. Neut. Nom. τρεις τρία Nom. τέσσαρες τέσσαρα Gen. ' Abl. - τριών τριών Gen. Abl. - τεσσάρων τεσσάρων Loc. Ins. >■ τρισί τρισί Loc. Ins. - τέσσαρσι τέσσαρσι Dat. _ Ace. τρεις τρία Dat. Ace. τέσσαρας τέσσαρα. These cardinals agree with the substantives with which they are used. 419. The declension of ούδείς, ούδεμία, ούδέν, no one {nobody) , nothing , is: NEGATIVES 173 Masc. Fem. Neut. Nom. Gen. ' ουδείς ούδεμία ουδέν Abl. / Loc. ούδενός ουδεμιάς ουδενός Ins. Dat. κ ούδενί ούδεμιόί οόδενί Acc. ουδένα ουδεμίαν ουδέν Like ούδεις is declined μηδείς, μηδεμία, μηδέν, no one , nothing, μη δεις is generally used wherever μή would be the appropriate negative. 420. A negative sentence in Greek may have more than one negative particle. In Greek the succession of negatives merely strengthens the first negative if the second (and third) is a compound form like ουδέ, ούδείς, ουχω, μηδείς, etc., e.g., μη δεν* μηδέν όφείλετε, owe no one anything. 421. ου and μή are used in direct questions to indicate the kind of answer expected. 1 . ο u expects the answer yes. ou τώ δνόματι έχροφητευσαμεν; Did we not prophesy by thy name? 2. μή expects the answer no. χαιδία, μή τι χροσφάγιον έχετε; Little children , have you anything to eat? ( You haven't anything to eat , have you?) 422. ou μή is used with the aorist subjunctive (rarely present) or occasionally the future ind. in the sense of an emphatic negative future indicative. 174 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR καί τον έρχόμενον τυρός με ού μή έκβάλω εξω, and him who comes to me I will not cast out. 423. Exercises I. I. καί ούκ εφαγεν ούδέν έν ταϊς ήμέραις έκείναις, καί συντελεσθεισών αυτών έπείνασεν. 2. ο υ δεις δύναται δυσί κυ ρίους δουλεύειν, τδν γάρ ενα μισήσει καί τδν ετερον αγαπή¬ σει. 3· δ Ερχόμενος προς έμέ ού μή πεινάση, καί ό πιστεύων είς έμέ ού μή διψήσει πώποτε. 4· είπεν ούν δ ’Ιησούς τοϊς δώδεκα Μ ή καί ύμεις θέλετε ύχάγειν; 5· ούκ είμί έλεύθερος ; ούκ είμί απόστολος; 6. δ θεός φώς έστιν καί σκοτία ούκ εστιν έν αύτώ ούδεμία. 7· ο ύ δεις αγαθός εί μή 1 είς δ θεός. 8. ούτε έμέ οίδατε ούτε τόν πατέρα μου. II. ι. Let no one enter the house. 2. Did he not see me? 3. I will not serve him. 4. Is he able to serve two masters? • j LESSON XLIX Present System of Contract Verbs in -έω. •I 424. Vocabulary άρνέομαι, I deny οίκοδομέω, I build δοκέω, I think , suppose; im- δμολογέω, I agree with , pers. it seems confess θεωρέω, I look at, gaze, see περιπατέω, I walk (live) μετανοέω, I repent φιλέω, I love 425. The conjugation of verbs with stems in α, ε, or 0, has been given in all tenses except the present and imperfect. The conjugation of these verbs (stems in α, ε, or 0) differs from that of regular ω- verbs in the present and imperfect tenses only. 1 εί μή (or εάν μή) with a substantive means except. CONTRACT VERBS 175 426. In the present and imperfect tenses the vowel (α, ε, or o) of the stem unites with the thematic vowel (and in some forms the personal ending also) and forms a diphthong or a single long vowel. This is called contraction. 427. The conjugation of φιλέω in the present system is as follows: I . The present indicative : Active Singular Plural 1. φιλώ (φιλέω) 2. φιλείς (φιλέεις) 3· φιλει (φιλέει) 1. φιλουμεν (φιλέομεν) 2. φιλείτε (φιλέετε) 3· φιλοΰσι (φιλέουσι) Middle and Passive Singular Plural 1. φιλουμαι (φιλέομαι) 2. φίλη (φιλέη) 3· φιλεΐται (φιλέεται) 1. φιλουμεθα (φιλεόμεθα) 2. φιλείσθε (φιλέεσθε) 3· φιλουνται (φιλέονται) 2. The present subjunctive: Active Singular Plural I. φιλώμεν (φιλέωμεν) 1. φιλώ (φιλέω) 2. φίλης (φιλέης) 3· φίλη (φιλέη) 2. φιλήτε (φιλέητε) 3· φιλώσι (φιλέωσι) Middle and Passive Singular Plural 1. φιλώμοα (φιλέωμαι) 2. [φίλη (φιλέη)] 3· φιλήται (φιλέηται) 1. φιλώμεθα (φιλεώμεθα) 2. φιλήσθε (φιλέησθε) 3· φιλώνται (φιλέωνται) 176 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR 3. The present imperative: Active Singular Plural 2. φίλει (φίλεε) 2. φιλεΐτε (φιλέετε) φιλείτω (φιλεέτω) 3· φιλείτωσαν (φιλεέτωσαν) Middle and Passive Singular Plural 2. φίλου (φιλέου) 2. φιλεϊσθε (φιλέεσθε) 3· φιλείσθω (φιλεέσθω) 3· φιλείσθωσαν (φιλεέσθωσαν) 4· The present infinitive: ACTIVE φιλεΐν (φιλέειν) Middle and Passive φιλείσθαι (φιλέεσθαι) 5. The present participle: Active φιλών (φιλέων), φιλούσα (φιλέουσα), φιλούν (φιλέον) Middle and Passive φιλούμενος, -η, -ον (φιλεόμενος, -η, -ον) 6. The imperfect indicative: Singular 1. έφίλουν (έφίλεον) 2. έφίλεις (έφίλεες) 3· έφίλει (έφίλεε) Active Plural 1. έφιλουμεν (έφιλέομεν) 2. έφιλείτε (έφιλέετε) 3· έφίλουν (έφίλεον) Middle and Passive Singular Plural 1. έφιλουμην (έφιλεόμην) I. έφιλουμεθα (έφιλεόμεθα) 2. έφιλοϋ (έφιλέου) 2. έφιλεϊσθε (έφιλέεσθε) 3· έφιλεΐτο (έφιλέετο) 3· έφιλοΰντο (έφιλέοντο) CONTRACT VERBS 177 428. The declension of the present active participle φιλών, -ούσα, -ούν is: Nom. Gen. Abl. Loc. Ins. - Dat. Acc. Nom. Gen. Abl. Loc. Ins. - Dat. „ Acc. Nom. Gen. Abl. Loc. Ins. Dat. Acc. Masc. Singular Fem. Neut . φιλών (φιλέων) φιλούσα (φιλέουσα) φιλούν (φιλέον) φιλούντος φιλούσης like masc. (φιλέοντος) φιλούντι φιλούση like masc. (φιλέοντι) φιλούντα φιλούσαν φιλούν (φιλέον) (φιλέοντα) Plural Masc. Fem. φιλούντες (φιλέοντες) φιλούσαι (φιλέουσαι) φιλούντων (φιλεόντων) φιλουσών φιλούσι (φιλέουσι) φιλοόσαις φιλούντας (φιλέοντας) φιλούσας Neut. φιλούντα (φιλέοντα) like masc. like masc. φιλούντα (φιλέοντα). 178 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR 429. The scheme of contraction for regular -εω verbs is as follows: ε + ε = ει ε + ει = ει ε + ο = ου ε + 7) = 7) \ ε + ω = ω ε + ου = ου 430. Observe that: ι. The syllable resulting from contraction has an accent if either one of the com¬ ponent syllables had an accent in the uncontracted form. 2. The accent is circumflex, if the first vowel (of the contracting vowels) had the acute; but it is an acute, if the second vowel had the acute. 431. Exercises I. I. καλώς χοιείτε τοΐς μισουσιν υμάς. 2. μή θαυμά¬ ζετε, άδελφοί, εΣ μισεί υμάς δ κόσμος. 3· ταύτα αυτού λαλοΟντος χολλοί έχίστευσαν. φ δέ ύμΐν δοκεί; 5· εάν τι αίτώμεθα κατά τδ θέλημα αυτού ακούει ημών. 6. καΣ μετά ταϋτα χεριεχάτει ’Ιησούς εν τη Γαλιλαία, ου γάρ ηθελεν έν τή Ίουδαία χεριχατείν, ότι έζήτουν αυτόν οί Ιουδαίοι άχοκτεΐναι. 7· έφο^ουντο τον λαόν. II. ι. Who is seeking to kill you? 2. He who hates his brother walks in darkness. 3. Follow me. 4. Quit doing these things. 5. They feared the crowd. LESSON L Comparison of Adjectives and Adverbs 432. Vocabulary εξεστιν, it is lawful , is χαλαιός, -ά, -όν, old , ancient possible χερισσός, -ή, -όν, abundant νέος, -α, -ον, young , new χλούσιος, -α, -ον, rich COMPARISON 179 433. The comparative degree of an adjective in -ος is generally formed by adding -τερος, -a, -ov to the masc. stem of adj. as found in the positive degree. To form the superlative1 degree, -τατος, -η, -ov is added to the masc. stem of adj. as found in the positive degree. 434. Examine carefully the following examples: Positive Comparative Superlative 1. ίσχϋρός, -ά, -δν, ισχυρότερος, -α, -ον, [ισχυρότατος, -η, -ον] strong stronger strongest 2. νέος, -α, -ον νεώτερος, -α, -ον [νεώτατος, -η, -ον] 3· σοφός, -ή, -όν σοφώτερος, -α, -ον [σοφώτατος, -η, -ον] a. The forms enclosed in brackets are not found in the New Testament. Similarly adjectives in -ες make the comparison. 4. ασθενής, -ές ασθενέστερος, -α, -ον [ασθενέστατος, -η, -ον] 435. Observe: 1. If the penult of the adjective (with nom. sing. masc. in -ος) is short2 in the positive, the 0 of the stem is lengthened to ω3 in the com¬ parative and superlative. 2. All comparatives and superlatives have recessive accent. 436. The stem from which the comparative is formed may be an adverb, e.g., έξω, out έξώτερος, outer ανω, Up , above ανώτερος, higher 1 There are only three superlative forms in -τατος in the New Testament. 2 A penult, although its vowel is short, is considered long if its vowel is followed by two consonants or a double consonant. 3 Sometimes -ώτερος occurs instead of -ότερος, and vice versa. 180 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR 437. With the comparative degree (of adverbs also) the ablative is commonly used to express the standard of comparison, e.g., τδ μωρόν τοΰ θεού σοφώτερον των άνθρώπων, the foolishness of God (is) wiser than men. ερχεται δέ ό ισχυρότερος μου, but there comes one stronger {mightier) than I. 438. The comparative may be followed by ή {than), then the standard of comparison is in the same case as the object compared, e.g., Σοδόμοις έν τή ημέρα έκείνη άνεκτότερον Ισται η τη πόλει έκείνη, it will be more tolerable in that day for Sodom than for that city. α. ή is used also in the comparison of clauses. 439. The superlative form is rare in the New Tes¬ tament. When it occurs, it generally has, not the true superlative sense, but the elative sense of very or exceedingly. In the New Testament the comparative with the article generally performs the peculiar functions of the superlative, e.g., 6 δέ μικρότερος έν τη βασιλεία των ο ύ ρ ανών, the least in the kingdom of heaven. 440. Adverbs are made from adjectives also. Note carefully the following example. Positive Comparative Superlative Ακριβώς, άκριβέστερον, [ακριβέστατα] accurately more accurately most accurately adj. άκριβιό^ COMPARISON 181 Observe: I. The positive degree of the adverb is made by adding the ablative ending -ως to the adjective stem. (In a mechanical way the positive degree of the adverb is formed from the positive degree of the adjective by changing final v of the ablative plural neuter to ς and retaining the accent of the adjective.) 2. The comparative of the adverb is the neut. sing. acc. of the adjective. 3. The superlative of the adverb is the neut. plur. acc. of the superlative of the adjective. 441. δ δέ, ή δέ, ο! δέ are used demonstratively to refer to persons already mentioned in an oblique case, e.g., χάλιν δέ δ Πειλάτος χροσεφώνησεν αυτοΐς, θέλων άχολΰσαι τον Ίησούν. οι δέ έχεφώνουν λέγοντες Σταύρου σταυρού αύτόν, And again Pilate spoke to them , wishing to release Jesus. But they shouted , saying, “Crucify, crucify him.” ο! δε refers to αυτοΐς. 442. In comparisons μάλλον {more, rather) and η are used with the positive degree. 443. Exercises I. I. καί τδ άσθενές (weakness) τού θεού ίσχυρότερον των άνθρώχων. 2. μακάριόν έστιν μάλλον διδόναι (to give) ή λαμβάνειν. 3· δ δέ όχίσω μου έρχόμενος ισχυρότερος μου έστίν. 4* Σάββατόν έστιν, καί ούκ έξεστίν σοι άραι τδν κράβαττον. δς δέ άχεκρίθη αύτοΐς 'Ο χοιήσας με υγιή έκεΐνός μοι είχεν ΤΑρον τδν κράβαττόν σου καί χεριχάτει. 5· αυτή δέ έστιν ή κρίσις ότι τδ φώς έλήλυθεν είς τδν κόσμον καί ήγάχησαν οί άνθρωχοι μάλλον τδ σκότος ή τδ φώς, ήν γάρ αυτών χονηρά τα έργα. 6. άχοκριθείς δέ δ ήγεμών είχεν αυτοΐς Τινα θέλετε άχδ τών δύο άχολύσω υμΐν; οί δέ είχαν Τδν Βαραββάν. 182 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR II. i. That man is stronger than I. 2. He said to them, “Come unto me.” They said to him, “We are not able to go.” 3. The children of God loved light rather (μάλλον) than darkness. 4. Seek ye rather to enter the kingdom than to die in sin. LESSON LI Comparison of Adjectives and Adverbs (Continued). Declension of Adjectives with Stems in -ov- 444. Vocabulary άφρων,-ον, foolish ευ, well ευθέως, adv., straightway , at once τέλειος, -a, -ov, finished , complete πολύ, adv., much ταχέως, ταχύ, adv., quickly σώφρων, -ov, of sound mindt sober-minded ώδε, adv., here , hither 445. The following adjectives show irregularities of comparison. Comparative suffix -ιων (masc.) Superlative suffix -ιστός (masc.) Positive Comparative Superlative άγαθός κρείσσων κράτιστος κρείττων (only as title) κακός χείρων ησσων μέγας μείζων μέγιστος μικρός μικρότερος έλάσσων έλάχιστος πολύς πλείων πλεΐστος χλέων COMPARISON 183 446. The declension of μείζων, -ον, the comparative of μέγας, is: STEM μεΐζον- (μειζοσ-) Singular Nom. Masc. and Fem. μείζων Neut. μεΐζον Gen. Abl. , * μείζονος μείζονος Loc. Ins. - μείζονι μείζονι Dat. , Acc. μείζονα, μείζω μεΐζον. Nom. Plural Masc. and Fem. μείζονες, μείζους Neut. μείζονα, μείζω Gen. Abl. - μειζόνων μειζόνων Loc. Ins. - μείζοσι μείζοσι Dat. Acc. μείζονας, μείζους μείζονα, μείζω. 447. Comparatives in -(ι)ων are declined like μείζων; ' so κρείσσων, χλείων, etc. The superlatives in -ιστός, -η, -ον are declined like adjectives of the first and second declensions. 448. Adjectives with stems in -ov- are declined like μείζων, except that they do not have the second forms like μείζω and μείζους: as οίφρων, -ον, σώφρων, -ov, etc. The voc. sing, of οίφρων is οίφρων (like nom.). 184 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR 449. Observe carefully the following examples of the comparison of irregular adverbs. (See 438, 1-3) : Positive Comparative Superlative ευ βέλτιον καλώς κάλλιον κακώς ήσσον (μάλα) μάλλον μάλιστα πολύ πλείον πλέον έγγύς έγγύτερον έγγιστα τάχα or τάχιον τάχιστα ταχέως τάχειον a. The positive of the adverb is sometimes made from the neut. acc. sing, of the adjective. 460. Exercises I. I. ήκουσαν οί Φαρισαίοι ότι ’Ιησούς πλείονας μαθητές ποιεί καί βαπτίζει ή Ίωάνης. 2. δ πιστεύων είς έμέ τα έργα α έγώ ποιώ κάκείνος1 ποιήσει καί μείζονα τούτων ποιήσει, δτι έγώ προς τον πατέρα πορεύομαι. 3· «φρων, ταύτη τή νυκτί τήν ψυχήν σου αίτούσι άπδ σοΰ. 4· λέγει ούν αυτώ ’Ιησούς, *0 ποιείς ποίησον τάχειον. 5* ούκ εστιν δούλος μείζων τού κυρίου αυτού ουδέ απόστολος μείζων τού πέμψαντος αυτόν. 6. έγώ γάρ είμι δ έλάχιστος τών αποστόλων. 7· τίς #ρα2 μείζων έστίν έν τή βασιλείς τών ουρανών; δστις ούν ταπεινώσει έαυτδν ως τδ παιδίον τούτο, ουτός έστιν δ μείζων έν τή βασιλείς τών ούρανών. II. ι. My brother is greater than I. 2. I hope to come unto you quickly. 3. I am able to do more work than this. 4. Is it lawful to do well on the sabbath? 1 See § 4, p. 217. 2 a pa, an inferential particle, then, therefore CONTRACT VERBS 185 LESSON LII Present System of Contract Verbs in -άω I 451. Vocabulary διαλογίζομαι, I consider , reason , τελευτάω, discuss έχε ρωτάω, I question , (a τιμάω, question) τολμάω, ίάομαι, I heal σιωχάω, χλανάω, I cause to wander , lead astray ( I finish) I die I honor I dare lam silent , keep si¬ lence 452. The conjugation of γεννάω, as an example of the -άω verbs, in the present system, is: I. THe present indicative: Singular 1. γεννώ (γεννάω) 2. γεννάς (γεννάεις) 3· γεννά (γεννάει) Active Plural 1. γεννώμεν (γεννάομεν) 2. γεννάτε (γεννάετε) γεννώσι (γεννάουσι) Middle and Passive Singular Plural 1. γεννώμαι (γεννάομαι) I. γεννώμεθα (γενναόμεθα) 2. γεννάσαι (γεννάεσαι) 2. γεννάσθε (γεννάεσθε) 3· γεννάται (γεννάεται) 3· γεννώνται (γεννάονται) 2. The present subjunctive: Active Singular 1. γεννώ (γεννάω) 2. γεννάς (γεννάης) 3· γεννά (γεννάη) Plural 1. γεννώμεν (γεννάωμεν) 2. γεννάτε (γεννάητε) 3· γεννώσι (γεννάωσι) 186 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR Note that the contract forms of the indicative and subjunctive active are alike. Middle and Passive Singular 1. γεννώμαι (γεννάωμαι) 2. [γενν£ (γεννάη)] 3· γεννάται (γεννάηται) Plural 1. γεννώμεθα (γενναώμεθα) 2. γεννάσθε (γεννάησθε) 3· γεννώνται (γεννάωνται) 3· The present imperative: Active Singular Plural 2. γέννα (γένναε) 2. γεννάτε (γεννάετε) 3· γεννάτω (γενναέτω) 3* γεννάτωσαν (γενναέτωσαν) Middle and Passive Singular Plural 2. γεννώ (γεννάου) 2. γεννάσθε (γεννάεσθε) 3· γεννάσθω (γενναέσθω) 3· γεννάσθωσαν (γενναέσθωσαν) 4· The present infinitive: Active γεννάν (γεννάειν) ; some editors write γεννάν Note, γεννάν really represents γενναεεν, for the inf. ending -ειν is a contraction of the thematic vowel ε and εν. Middle and Passive γεννάσθαι (γεννάεσθαι) 5. The present participle: Active γεννών (γεννάων), γεννώσα (γεννάουσα), γεννών (γεννάον) Middle and Passive γεννώμενος, -η, -ον (γενναόαενος) CONTRACT VERBS 187 6. The imperfect indicative: Singular Active Plural 1. έγέννων (έγένναον) I. έγεννώμεν (έγεννάομεν) 2. έγέννας (έγένναες) 2. έγεννάτε (έγεννάετε) 3 . έγέννα (έγένναε) 3· έγέννων (έγένναον) Note. In the third plur. a form like έγέννουν is sometimes found. Thus from έ ρωτάω, imperfect ή ρωτούν. This confusion between -άω and -έω verbs began early in the Ionic. Middle and Passive 1. έγεννώμην (έγενναόμην) I. έγεννώμεθα (έγενναόμεθα) 2. έγεννώ (έγεννάου) 2. έγεννάσθε (έγεννάεσθε) 3- έγεννάτο (έγεννάετο) 3· ^γεννώντο (έγεννάοντο) 453. The declension of the present active participle γεννών, -ώσα, ών is: Singular Masc. Fem. Nom. Gen. Abl. γεννών (γεννάων) γεννώντος (γεννάοντος) Loc. Ins. Dat. γεννώντι (γεννάοντι) Acc. γεννώντα (γεννάοντα) Neut. Nom. Gen. Abl. γεννών (γεννάον) like masc. γεννώσα (γεννάουσα) γεννώσης (γενναουσης) γεννώση (γενναούσχ)) γεννώσαν (γεννάουσαν) 188 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR ,1 like masc. Loc. Ins. Dat. Acc. γεννών (γεννάον) Plural Masc. Nom. γεννώντες (γεννάοντες) Fem. γεννώσαι (γεννάουσαι) γεννώντων (γενναόντων) γεννωσών (γενναουσών) γεννώσι (γεννάουσι) γεννώσαις (γενναούσαις) Gen. Abl. Loc. Ins. Dat. Acc. γεννώντας (γεννάοντας) γεννώσας (γενναουσας) Neut. Nom. γεννώντα (γεννάοντα) like masc. like masc. Gen. Abl. Loc. Ins. Dat. Acc. γεννώντα (γεννάοντα) 454. The scheme of contraction for regular -άω verbs is as follows: a -j- ε = a a + η = a a + ει = $ α + ει(=ε-|-ε) = a a + V = ΛΚ«)ται (χληρόηται) CONTRACT VERBS 193 If the plural had been used in the New Testament it would have probably been like the pres. ind. Forms in brackets [] are not found in the New Testament. 3. The present imperative: Active Singular Plural 2. χλήρου (χλήροε) 2. χληρουτε (χληρόετε) 3· χληρουτω (χληροέτω) 3· πληρουτωσαν (χληροέτωσαν) Middle and Passive Singular Plural 2. χληροϋ (χληρόου) 2. χληροΰσθε (χληρόεσθε) 3· χληρούσθω (χληροέσθω) 3· πληρούσθωσαν (χληροέσθω- σαν) 4· The present infinitive : Active χληροΟν (χληρόειν); some editors write χληροίν. χληροΟν is for χληροεεν. See note to 45^» 4· Middle and Passive χληροΰσθαι (χληρόεσθαι). 5. The present participle : Active χληρών (χληρόων), χληρούσα (χληρόουσα), χληροϋν (χληρόον) Middle and Passive χληρούμενος, -η, -ον (χληροόμενος). 194 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR 6. The imperfect indicative : Active Singular Plural 1. έχλήρουν (έχλήροον) I. έχληρούμεν (έχληρόομεν) 2. έχλήρους (έχλήροες) 2. έχληρούτε (έχληρόετε) 3· έχλήρου (έχλήροε) 3· έπλήρουν (έχλήροον) In the third plur. a form like έχληρούσαν (έχληρόοσαν) is found. Middle and Passive Singular Plural 1. έχληρούμην (έχληροόμην) I. έχληρούμεθα (έχληροόμεθα) 2. έχληρού (έχληρόου) 2. έχληρούσθε (έχληρόεσθε) 3· έχληρούτο (έχληρόετο) 3· έχληρουντο (έχληρόοντο) 463. The present active participle χληρών, χληρούσα, χληροϋν is declined like φιλών, φιλούσα, φιλούν (427). The result of contraction is the same in both cases: ε -f 0 = ou; and 0 + 0 = ou. 464. The scheme of contraction for regular -όω verbs is as follows: 0 -b ε = ou 0 + 0 = ou 0 + η = ω ο + ω = ω ο -f ει = οι ο + η = οι 0 + OU = 0U 465. Exercises I. I. ώστε, αδελφοί μου, ζηλούτε τό χροφητεύειν. 2. τά δέ έκχορευόμενα έκ τού στόματος έκ τής καρδίας έξέρχεται, κάκεϊνα κοινοί τδν ά'νθρωχον. 3· σύν «ύτώ σταυρούσιν δύο ληστάς. 4· ειχεν αυτοίς 'Υμείς έσχέ οί δικαιούντες εαυτούς ένώχιον των άνθρώχων. 5· καί είχατε Άρχίχχψ Βλέχε την διακονίαν ήν χαρέλαβες έν κυρίψ, Υνα αυτήν CONJUGATION OF με-VERBS 195 πληροίς. 6. ελεγον την εξοδον (departure) αυτού ήν ήμελλεν πληρούν έν Ιερουσαλήμ. II. ι . They were crucifying him with two robbers. 2. Let us love him who justifies us. 3. The works of the righteous are being made manifest. 4. That which goes into the mouth does not defile man. LESSON LV Conjugation of με-verbs: δεδωμε. Second Aorist of γενώσκω 466. Vocabulary δεδωμε, I give , deliver άχο δεδωμε, I give up or back; restore ; pay; midd., sell έχεγενώσκω, I recognize , discover έχε δίδωμι, I give over χαραδεδωμε, I give over (to another), deliver up, betray 467. Greek verbs are of two main conjugations, the ω-conjugation and the με-conjugation. The con¬ jugation which has been studied thus far, except ε(μί, is the ω-conjugation (ω-verbs). The verbs in -ω are by far more common than the verbs in -μι. The verbs (or conjugations) are so named because the ending of the first person singular present in¬ dicative active of one is -ω and of the other is -με. 468. με-verbs differ from ω-verbs only in the present and second aorist (called με-aorist) sys¬ tems. The essential difference between the με-verbs and ω-verbs in these systems is that the με-verbs do not have the thematic vowel °/e which the ω- 196 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR verbs have, before the personal endings. The sub¬ junctive of the μι-verbs, however, has the thematic vowel ω/η (mode-sign). In the other tense systems the μι-verbs and the ω-verbs are conjugated alike. 469. The principal parts of διδωμι1 are: δίδίομι, δώσω, εδωκα, δέδωκα, δέδομαι, έδόθην Observe that: ι. The verb stem is δο-. 2. The present stem is the reduplicated verb-stem, with the vowel t in the reduplication. 470. The present active of δίδωμι is: 1. Indicative: Singular Plural 1. δίδωμι I. [δίδομεν] 2. δίδω$ 2. [δίδοτε] 3· δίδωσι 3· διδόασι In the first sing, a form διδώ (from διδόω) occurs. 2. Subjunctive: Singular 1. [διδώ] 2. [διδως or διδοΐς] 3· διδώ or διδοί 3· Imperative: Singular 2. δίδου 3· διδότω 4· Infinitive: διδόναι Plural 1. [διδώμεν] 2. [διδώτε] 3· [διδώσι] Plural 2. δίδοτε 3· [διδότωσαν] 1 μι-verbs compounded with prepositions are numerous. The uncompounded forms of all μι-verbs are given as quotable in the New Testament, although the form may be found only in com¬ pounds. CONJUGATION OF μι-VERBS 197 5. Participle: διδους, διδοϋσα, διδόν The participle is declined like λύων except for the nom. sing, masc., and the accent. 471. The imperfect indicative active of δίδωμι is: Singular Plural 1. [έδίδουν] 2. [έδίδους] 3· έδίδου 1. [εδίδομεν] 2. [έ δ t δοτέ] 3· έδίδοσαν, έδίδουν 472. The present middle and passive of δίδωμι is: 1. Indicative: Singular Plural 1. [δίδομαι] I. διδόμεθα 2. [δίδοσαι] 2. [δίδοσθε] 3. δίδοται 3 . [δίδονται] 2. Subjunctive: Does not occur in the New Testament. 3. Imperative: Does not occur in the New Testament. 4. Infinitive: δίδοσθαι 5. Participle: διδόμενος, -η, -ον 473. The imperfect indicative middle and passive of δίδωμι is: Singular Plural 1. [έδιδόμην] I. [έδιδόμεθα] 2. [έδίδοσο] 2. [έδίδοσθε] 3. έδίδοτο, έδίδετο 3· [έδίδοντο] 198 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR 474. The aorist (μι-aorist) active of δίδωμι is: I. Indicative: Singular 1. εδωκα 2. εδωκας 3· εδωκε Plural 1. έδώκαμεν 2. έδώκατε 3· εδωκαν, εδοσαν Aorists made with the suffix -κα are called κ- aorists. Actually they are not μι- aorists. 2. Subjunctive: Singular 1. δω 2. δ ως, δοΐς 3· δω, δοΐ, δώγ) Plural 1. δώμεν 2. δώτε 3· δώσι ’· Some forms like δώσγ), δώσω μεν are probably aorist subjunctives from a first aorist έδωσα (found in the papyri). 3. Imperative: Singular Plural 2. δός 2. δότε 3. δότω 3· [δότωσαν] 4· Infinitive: δούναι 5· Participle: δούς, [δοΰσα], [δόν] Declined like the present act. participle. CONJUGATION OF μι-VERBS 199 475. The aorist middle of δίδωμι is: i. Indicative: Singular 1. [έδόμην] 2. [εδου] 3· Ιδοτο, εδετο Plural 1. [έδόμεθα] 2. εδοσθε 3· £δοντο 2. Subjunctive: Does not occur in the New Testament. 3. Imperative: Does not occur in the New Testament. 4. Infinitive: Does not occur in the New Testament. 5. Participle: Does not occur in the New Testament. 476. Some ω-verbs have aorists conjugated like those of μι-verbs. 1. The aorist (μι-aorist) indicative active of γινώσκω is: Singular 1. εγνων 2. εγνως 3· εγνω Plural 1. Ιγνωμεν 2. εγνωτε 3· Ιγνωσαν 2. The subjunctive is γνώ, γνώς, etc., with ω throughout. But third sing, is γνοϊ. 3. The imperative is γνώθι, γνώτω, γνώτε, [γνώτωσαν] 4· The infinitive is γνώναι 5. The participle γνούς, γνουσα, [γνόν]. 200 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR 477. Exercises I. I. υμΐν το μυστήριον δέδοται τής βασιλείας τού θεού. 2. Κύριε, τίς έστιν δ χαραδιδούς σε; 3· παντί αίτοϋντί σε δίδου. 4· δέ ου χοιώ τα έργα τού χατρός μου, μή χιστεύετε μοι. ε! δέ χοιώ, καν1 έμοί μή χιστεύητε, τοΐς εργοις χιστεύετε, ινα γνώτε καί γινώσκητε δτι έν έμοί δ χατήρ κάγώ έν τώ χατρί. 5· ^ότε αυτοΤς υμείς φαγεΐν. 6. λέγω δέ υμΐν δτι ’Ηλείας ήδη ήλθεν, καί ουκ έχέγνωσαν αυτόν. 7· ασύδοτε χάσι τάς όφειλάς (dues). 8. εξεστιν δούναι κήνσον (poll-tax, tribute) Καίσαρι ή ου; δώμεν ή μή δώμεν; II. ι. If I know all mysteries and have not love, I am nothing. 2. I give you power to cast out de¬ mons. 3. Jesus was giving bread to the disciples that they might give it to the multitude. LESSON LVI Conjugation of μι-Verbs (cont’d): ΐστημι. Present Imperative of είμί. Second Aorist of βαίνω φημί Vocabulary 478. ΐστημι, I make to stand , place , stand άνθίστημι, I set against , withstand άνίστημι, I raise up} rise , arise άφίστημι, I put away , de¬ part from έμβαίνω, I go into , embark έφίστημι, I stand upon or by , come upon καθίστημι, I set down , ap¬ point μεταβαίνω, I pass over , de¬ part χαρίστημι, I place beside , stand by 1 καν = καί εάν, “even if,” “though.” CONJUGATION OF μι-VERBS 201 έξίστημι, I am amazed , am συν (στη μι, I commend , es- beside myself tablish 479. The principal parts of Υστημι are: Υστημι, στήσω, έστησα, εστηκα, [Ισταμαι], έστάθην, second aor. act. εστην. Observe that: I. The verb-stem is στα- 2. The present stem is the verb-stem reduplicated, with the vowel i in the reduplication. ιστα- is for σιστα- (initial σ is represented by the rough breathing). 480. The conjugation of is: I. Indicative: Singular 1. Υστημι 2. [Υστης] 3. Υστησι Υστημι in the present active Plural 1. [Υσταμεν] 2. [Υστατε] 3· [ίστάσι] Many forms from Ιστάνω occur. They are regular in their conjugation. 2. Subjunctive: Does not occur in the New Testament. 3. Imperative: Does not occur in the New Testament. 4. Infinitive: ιστάναι 5. Participle: Ιστάς, [ιστάσα], [ιστάν]. (στάς is declined like πας. 481. Imperfect indicative active forms of Υστημι do not occur in the New Testament. 202 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR 482. The conjugation of the present middle and passive of Υστημι is : I. Indicative: Singular Plural 1. ίσταμαι 2. Υστασαι 1. ίστάμεθα 2. Υστασθε 3· Υστανται 3· Υσταται 2. Subjunctive: Does not occur in the New Testament. 3. Imperative: Singular 2. Υστασο 3· [ίστάσθω] 4. Infinitive: 5. Participle: Plural 2. [Υστασθε] 3· [ίστάσθωσαν] Υστασθαι ισταμενος, -η, -ον 483. The imperfect indicative middle and passive of Υστημι is: Singular Plural 1. ιστάμην1 I. ίστάμεθα 2. [Υστασο] 2. Υστασθε ιστατο 3· Υσταντο 484. pers. plur. sing. 485. φημί, I say} is found in the pres. ind. act. first sing, φημί, third pers. sing, φησί, third pers. φασί, and in the imperfect ind. act. third pers. εφη. The present forms are enclitic. The present imperative of είμί, I am , is: Singular Plural 2. Υσθι 3· έστω, ήτω 2. [εστε] 3. εστωσαν . | 1 Long t. See 70, 2. CONJUGATION OF μι-VERBS 203 486. The aorist (μι-aorist) active of ΐ στη μι is: I. Indicative: Singular Plural I. εστην I. Ιστημεν 2. [εστης] 2. εστητε 3· εστη 3· έστησαν The difference in meaning between εστην and έστησα (first aorist) is that Ιστην, I stood , is intran- sitive, and έστησα, I set or placed , is transitive. 2. Subjunctive: Singular Plural I. [στώ] I. [στώμεν] 2. [στης] 2. στήτε 3· στη 3. στώσι 3· Imperative: Singular Plural 2. στήθι, 2. στήτε -στα 3· στήτω 3· [στήτωσαν] -στα occurs only in compounds. 4. Infinitive: στήναι 5. Participle: στάς, [στάσα], [στάν] -στάς is declined like χας. 487. Like εστην is conjugated εβην the second (or μι-) aorist of βαίνω. Thus: Ind. act. εβην, εβης, etc. Subj. act. third sing. βή. Imperative act. βήθι and -βα, βάτω, -βατέ. 204 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR Infinitive act. βήναι Participle act. βάς, declined like χάς. In the New Testament βαίνω occurs only in com¬ pounds (see vocabulary). 488. Exercises I. I. καί άναστάς ήλθεν χρός τον χατέρα έαυτου. 2. καί ήκουσαν φωνής μεγάλης έκ τοΰ ουρανού λεγούσης αύτοίς ’Ανάβατε ώδε,1 καί άνέβησαν εις τόν ουρανόν έν τή νεφέλη. 3· ειχεν δέ τω άνδρί ’Έγειρε καί στήθι εις τό μέσον (midst) καί άναστάς έστη. φ *«ταβάς δέ Πέτρος χρός τούς ά'νδρας είχεν ’Ιδού έγώ είμι δν ζητείτε. 5· παρέστη γάρ μοι ταυτη τή νυκτί τοΰ θεού ου είμί, ω καί λατρεύω (serve), άγγελος λέγων Μη φοβοΰ, Παύλε. Καίσαρί σε δει χαραστήναι. 6. δ νόμος γάρ άνθρώχους καθίστησιν άρχιερεϊς έχοντας ασθένειαν. II. ι. An angel stood by Paul in the night. 2. Two men went up into the temple. 3. Who appointed you a ruler of the people? 4. The dis¬ ciples went into the boat. LESSON LVII Conjugation of μι-Verbs (Continued) : τίθημι 489. Vocabulary τίθημι, I place , lay , put (down) έχιτίθημι, I lay upon, place upon μνημεΐον, τό, sepulchre, tomb χαρατίθημι, I set before, commit χροστίθημι, I add, give in addition 1 ώδε, adv. hither , here. CONJUGATION OF μι-VERBS 205 490. The principal parts of τίθημι are: τίθημι, θήΰω, εθηκα, τέθεικα, τέθειμαι, έτέθην Observe that: I. The verb-stem is θε-. 2. The present stem is the reduplicated verb-stem, with the vowel i m the reduplication. 3. The aorist indie, has -κα as suffix. 491. The present active of τίθημι is: 1. Indicative: Singular 1. τίθημι 2. [τίθης] 3· τίθησι 2. Subjunctive: Singular ι. τιθώ 2. τιθής 3· τιθή 3· Imperative: Singular 2. τίθει 3· τιθέτω 4· Infinitive: τιθέναι 5· Participle: τιθείς, τιθεϊσα, τιθέν Declined like the aorist passive participle of .όω: λυθείς, -εΐσα, -έν, (350). Plural 1. τίθεμεν 2. τίθετε 3· τιθέασι Plural 1. τιθώμεν 2. τιθήτε 3· τιθώσι Plural 2. τίθετε 3· [τιθέτωσαν] 206 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR 492. The imperfect indicative active of τίθημι is: Singular Plural 1. [έτίθην] I. [έτίθεμεν] 2. [έτίθεις] 2. [έτίθετε] 3. έτίθει 3· έτίθεσαν A third pers. plur. έτίθουν is from τιθέω. 493. The conjugation of the present middle and passive of τίθημι is: I. Indicative: Singular Plural 1. [τιθέμεθα] 2. τίθεσθε 3 . τίθενται 1. τίθεμαι 2. [τίθεσαι] 3· τίθεται 2. Subjunctive: Does not occur in the New Testament. 3. Imperative: Plural 2. [τίθεσθε] 3· τιθέσθωσαν i Singular 2. [τίθεσο] 3· [τιθέσθω] 4· Infinitive: τίθεσθαι 5· Participle: τιθέμενος, -η, -ον 494. The imperfect indicative middle and passive of τίθημι is: Singular Plural 1. [έτιθέμην] I. [έτιθέμεθα] 2. [έτίθεσο] 2. [έτίθεσθε] 3* έτίθετο 3· ετίθεντο CONJUGATION OF μι-VERBS 207 495. The aorist active of τίθημι is: I. Indicative: Singular Plural 1. εθηκα I. έθήκαμεν 2. έθηκας 2. έθήκατε 3· έθηκε 3· έθηκαν As is the case with δίδωμι, so τίθημι has the κ- aorist in the indicative active. Other modes are of the μι- aorist type. 2. Subjunctive: Singular Plural 1. θώ 2. θγ)ς 3· 3· Imperative: Singular 2. θές 3· [θέτω] 4· Infinitive: 1. Θώμεν 2. [θήτε] 3· θώσι Plural 2. θέτε 3· [θέτωσαν] θ είναι 5· Participle: θείς, [θεισα], [θέν] Declined like τιθείς. 496. The aorist middle of τίθημι is: I. Indicative: Singular 1. έθέμην 2. εθου 3· έθετο Plural 1. [έθέμεθα] 2. έθεσθε 3· έθεντο 208 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR 2. Subjunctive: Singular Plural 1. [θώμαι] I. θώμεθα 2. [θή] 2. [θήσθε] 3. [θήται] 3· [θώνται] 3. Imperative: Singular Plural 2. θού 2. θέσθε 3. [θέσθω] 3· [θέσθωσαν] 4. Infinitive: 5. Participle θέσθαι θέμενος, -η, -ον 497. Exercises I. I. πας άνθρωπος πρώτον τον καλόν οίνον τίθησιν. 2. καί φωνήσας φωνή μεγάλη δ ’Ιησούς είπεν Πάτερ, είς χείράς σου παρατίθεμαι τδ πνεύμα μου. 3· ήραν τον κύριον έκ τού μνημείου, καί ούκ οιδαμεν πού εθηκαν αυτόν. 4· δ δέ κύριος προσετίθει τους σωζομένους καθ’ ημέραν1 επί τδ αυτό.1 5· διά τούτο με δ πατήρ αγαπά δτι έγώ τίθημι τήν ψυχήν μου, ΐνα πάλιν λάβω αυτήν, ούδείς ήρεν αυτήν άπ’ έμού, άλλ’ έγώ τίθημι αυτήν άπ’ έμαυτοΰ. II. ι. The good shepherd lays down his life for the sheep. 2. The apostle commends the disciple to the Lord. 3. I do not know where they laid him. 4. He was placing his hands upon the children. Note: The students may now begin to read I John and continue it as Lessons after Lesson LIX is finished. 1 καθ’ ήμέραν, daily. 2 ίτά xb αυτό, (to the same), together. I CONJUGATION OF μι-VERBS LESSON LVm 209 Conjugation of μι-Verbs (Continued) : άφίημι, συνίημι Other Verbs : Old Forms Vocabulary 498. άφίημι, I send away , for- συνίημι, I perceive , under¬ stand τότε, adv., then ηγαγον, second aor. ind. give, leave, let είδώς, -υΤα, -ός, knowing έστώς, ώσα, ός, standing γίδειν, old pluperf. (with act. of αγω imp. meaning) of οίδα. κλίνη, ή, bed 499. The verb ιημι, I send, occurs in the New Testa¬ ment only in compounds. Of this verb the most common compounds are άφίημι (αχό -p ϊημΟ and συνίημι. The verb-stem of Υημι is έ-. The present stem is the reduplicated verb-stem, with i in the reduplica¬ tion. The principal parts of άφίημι are: άφίημι, άφήσω, άφήκα, άφέωνται (third plur.), άφέθην. 500. The following forms of άφίημι are those which occur most frequently in the New Testament. Present indicative active: Singular 1. [άφίημι] 2. άφεϊς (from άφίω) 3· άφίησι Plural 1. άφίεμεν, άφίομεν 2. άφίετε 3· άφίουσι Imperfect indicative active: Third sing, ηφιεν (notice augment of the preposition) 210 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR Present active imperative: Third sing, άφιέτω. Present active infinitive : άφιέναι Present indicative middle and passive: Singular Plural 3. άφίεται 3· άφ£ενται άφ(ονται The aorist (κ-aorist) indicative active άφήκα is conjugated like εθηκα. The second (μι-) aorist subjunctive active: Singular Plural 1. άφώ 2. - 3· «ΦΏ I. - 2: άφήτε 3. άφώσί The second aor. imperative active: Singular Plural 2. αφες 2. αφετε The second aor. infinitive active ^φείναι The second aor. participle active άφείς (masc.). 501. The following forms of συνίημι occur. Present ind. act. third plur. συνιάσι and συνίουσι. Present subj. act. third plur. συνίωσι. Present act. participle συνιείς and συνίων. Second aor. subj. third plur. συνώσι. 502. The verb αγω has a reduplicated second aorist ηγαγον. Ind. ηγαγον, ήγαγες, etc. Subj. άγάγω, όγάγης, etc. ; CONJUGATION OF μι-VERBS 211 and the rest like ελιχον, except the reduplication throughout the aorist. 503. The old pluperfect of οίδα with the meaning of the imperfect is I. Indicative active: Singular Plural 1. ηδειν, I knew I. [h δειμεν] 2. ηδεις 2. ηδειτε 3· Τϊδει 3· βδεισαν 2. The old perfect subjunctive (with meaning the present) of this verb is Active Singular Plural - I. ειδώ I. είδώμεν 2. είδης 2. είδήτε 3· είδϋ 3· [είδώσι] 3. The old perf. infinitive, είδέναι 4. The old perf. participle, είδώς, είδυία, είδος (with meaning of the present). Declined like λελυκώς, -υία, -ός. 504. An old perfect active participle from ϊστημι is found also in the New Testament. Nom. έστώς, έστώσα, έστός Gen. έστώτος, έστώσης, έστώτος The other cases can be easily formed from these, έστώς has the intensive meaning, standing. 505. Exercises I. I. δ μισθωτός (hireling) καί ούκ ών χοιμήν, οδ ούκ εστιν τά χρόβατα ’ίδια, θεωρεί τον λύκον (wolf) ερχόμενον καί άφίησιν τά χρόβατα καί φεύγει. 2. διά τούτο έν χαραβο- 212 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR λαίς αυτοίς λαλώ, δτι βλέχοντες ου βλέχουσιν καί άκουοντες ούκ άκουουσιν ουδέ συνίουσιν. 3· αγωμεν καί ημείς ϊνα άχοθάνωμεν μετ’ αύτου. φ τ& Ύ^Ρ ^στΕν εύκοχώτερον (easier), είχείν Άφίενταί σου αί αμαρτία:, ή είχείν "Εγειρε καί χεριχάτει; ινα δέ είδήτε δτι έξουσίαν εχει δ υιός του άνθρώχου έχί τής γης αφιέναι αμαρτίας — τότε λέγει 'τφ χαραλυτικω (paralytic) ’Έγειρε αρόν σου τήν κλίνην καί υχαγε είς τδν οίκον σου. 5· *αί θεωρεί τδν ΊησοΟν έστώτα, καί ούκ ήδει οτι Ιησούς έστίν. 6. Ίησοΰς ο5ν είδώς χάντα τα έρχόμενα έχ’ αυτόν έξήλθεν, καί λέγει αύτοίς Τίνα ζητείτε; II. ι. We saw him standing in the boat. 2. He said to the man, “Thy sins are forgiven.” 3. I knew not who it was. 4. They led the servants to the house. LESSON LIX The Optative Mode. Wishes 506. ευαγγελίζομαι, I proclaim glad tidings ( preach the gospel) όλίγος, -η, -ον, few, little , small χαρουσία, ή, coming , presence σημεΐον, τό, sign σήμερον, adv., to-day , this day 507. Besides the indicative, subjunctive, and im¬ perative modes, there is another mode in Greek, called the Optative. In meaning the optative is a sort of weaker sub¬ junctive. The subjunctive and optative are really different forms of the same mode, the mode of hesi¬ tating affirmation. 1 κλίνη, ή, a couch, a bed OPTATIVE MODE 213 608. In the New Testament the optative mode occurs only sixty-seven times, and in the present and aorist tenses only. 509. Of the forms of the optative mode found in the New Testament the following are representative: I. Present tense (act. and middle): Singular Plural 2. I. δυναίμην ' ειη (from είμί) 3· 1 £χοι θέλοι 2. 3· χασχοιτε εχοίεν δυναιντο ν. Second aorist (act. and middle) : Singular PluraJ- 3. ευροίεν I. όναίμην (fr. δνίνημι) δωη (fr. δίδωμι) λάβοι 3· * τΰχοι φάγοι γένοιτο 3· First aorist (act. and middle) : Singular Plural I. ευξαίμην χερισσεύσαι 3· χλεονάσαι καταρτίσαι w κατευθυναι 3· ποιήσαιεν ψηλαφήσειαν 4· First aorist passive: Third sing., λογισθείη, χληθυνθείη, τηρηθείη. Observe that: 1. There are two mode signs for the optative, either 1 or ιη. 2. i is used with the¬ matic tense stems, as εχοι, ευξαίμην. 3. ιη is used with 214 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR the non-thematic tense stems, as εΥη, δώη. 4. ιε and ta in the third person plural of both stems. 5. The mode sign (t) contracts with the vowel of the stem. 510. A wish about the future is usually expressed in the New Testament by the optative (generally the aorist), e.g., αυτός δέ 6 θεός τής ειρήνης ayiaaat υμάς όλοτελεις, May the God of peace himself sanctify you wholly. The commonest wish of this kind is the phrase μή γένοίτο, may it not become. A wish about the future may be expressed by όφελον 1 and the future indicative — once in N. T. 511. A wish about the present is expressed by όφελον and the imperfect indicative, e.g., όφελον ψυχρός ής ή ζεστός, would that thou Wert cold ΟΥ hot. 512. A wish about the past is expressed by όφελον and the aorist indicative, e.g., 'όφελον έβασιλεόσατε, would that you did reign 513. The fourth class condition is the condition undetermined and with remote prospect of deter¬ mination. ei and the optative in the protasis, and the optative with άν in the apodosis. In the New Testament no whole example of this class of con¬ ditions occurs. There is found the condition (pro¬ tasis) or the conclusion (apodosis), but not both at the same time. εί καί χάσχοιτε, if you should even suffer (protasis) εύξαίμην άν, I could pray (potential optative). 1 δφελον is just the second aor. of οφείλω without augment. PART II:1 SUPPLEMENT TO PART I 1 Part II is based on ilA Grammar of the Greek New Testament in the Light of Historical Research ,M by A. T. Robertson. . ' 1 . . : :·· ,· . , . ■ ' ·. , SOUNDS AND WRITING 217 A. Sounds and Writing § 1. Syncope is the suppression of a short vowel between consonants for the sake of facility in pro¬ nunciation. Tnus χατρός for χατέρος. § 2. Diaeresis (. separation ) is indicated by a double dot (*’), written over t or u to show that t or u does not form a diphthong with the preceding vowel. Thus χρωΐ, early; ίσχύϊ, by strength; Μωϋσής, Moses. § 3. Elision is the dropping of a short vowel at the end of a word before a word beginning with a vowel. E.g., ax’ αρχής for άχδ αρχής, ούδ’ ΐνα for ουδέ tva, άφ’ έαυτοΰ for άχδ έαυτοΰ. Note that an apostrophe marks the omission of the vowel. § 4. Crasis is the contraction of a vowel or diph¬ thong at the end of a word with one at the beginning of the next word. Thus κάμοί for καί έμοί; κάκείνος for και έκεΐνος; τουνομα for τδ δνομα. Note that crasis is indicated by the coronis (’) over the contracted form. § 5. When a smooth mute (x, κ, τ) is brought before the rough breathing by elision or in forming com¬ pounds, it is changed to the corresponding rough mute. This is called aspiration. Thus άνθ’ ών for άντί ών; έφ’ ω for έχΐ φ; άφίημι (άχδ -f ?ημΟ· 218 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR § 6. The vowels a, e, o are often interchanged in words of the same root. Sometimes there is an interchange among different vowels. This is called interchange or gradation of vowels. Thus πείθω, second perf. πέποιθα; τρέφω, I nourish , τροφή, nourish¬ ment , έτράφην, I was nourished. § 7. Modern editors of Greek texts use four punc¬ tuation marks: the comma and period are used as in English; the interrogation mark (;) is in form like the English semicolon; the point above the line (*) corresponds to the English semicolon or colon. PARADIGMS OF NOUNS 219 B. Paradigms of Nouns {a) Substantives § 8. Some masculines in -ας of the first declension. βορράς, δ, north (wind) Singular Nom. βορράς Gen. ' Abl. j βορρά Loc. Ins. Dat. Acc. Voc. β°ΡΡ άμην] [έλέλυσο] (έ)λέλυτο [έλελύμεθα] (έ)λέλυσθε (έ)λέλυντο λόσωμαι λ ύ σγ) Periphrastic : λύσηται Perf. midd. λυσώμεθα part, and λύσησθε Sllbj. of είμ£. λυσωνται λυσαίμην [λύσαιο] [λόσαιτο] [λυσαίμεθα] [λύσαίσθε] [λυσαιντο] λϋσαι λέλυσο λυσάσθω [λελύσθω] λόσασθε λέλυσθε λυσάσθωσαν [λελύσθωσαν] λύσασθαι λελόσθα: λυσάμενος, -η, -ον λελυμένος, -η, -ον Passive Voice The passive voice of the present, imperfect, per¬ fect and pluperfect tenses is the same in form as the middle. PARADIGMS OF VERBS 229 ι Aorist ι Indic. I. έλύθην S. * 2. έλυθης . 3· <^υθη I. έλύθημεν Ρ. - 2. έλύθητε 3· Πόθησαν SUBJ. I. λυθώ S. - 2. λυθής . 3· λυθγ) I. λυθώμεν Ρ. - 2. λυθήτε 3· λυθώσι Opt. I. [λυθείην] S. - 2. [λυθείης] „ 3· λυθείη I. [λυθείημεν] Ρ. - 2. [λυθείητε] _ 3· [λυθείησαν] Imp. 2. λύθητι S. | 3· λυθήτω Ρ. - 2. λόθητε 3· λυθήτωσαν. Inf. λυθήναι Part. λυθείς, -εΐσα, -έν Future I Future Perf. λυθήσομαι [λελύσομαε] λυθήση [λελύση] λυθήσεται [λελύσεται] λγφησόμεθα [λελυσόμεθα] λυθήσεσθε [λελύσεσθε] λυθήσονταε [λελύσονται] [λυθήσεσθαε] λυθησόμενος 230 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR § 20. κάθημαι (κατα -f- ήμαι), I sit , I Stem ήσ- Present INDIC. f I. κάθημαι f I. S. i 2. κάθη -s 2. 3. κάθηται [ 3- I. [καθήμεθα] Γ I. P. -J 2. [κάθησθε] -* 2. 3· κάθηνται (_ 3· SUBJ. Γ I. [καθώμαι] S. - 2. [καθή] . 3· [χαθηται] I. [καθώμεθα] Ρ. ^ 2. καθήσθε 3· [χαθώνται] Imp. Γ 2. κάθου (as if from S. ί κάθομαι) am seated . Imperfect [έκαθήμην] [έκάθησο] έκάθητο [έκαθήμεθα] [έκάθησθε] έκάθηντο Ρ. \ 3· 2. 3· Inf. Part. καθήσθαι καθήμενος, -η, -ον § 21. κείμαι, I lie , I am laid. Stem κει- Indic. S. Present 1. κείμαι 2. [κεϊσαι] 3· κείται -l Imperfect 1. [έκείμην] 2. [εκεισο] 3. εκειτο PARADIGMS OF VERBS 231 P. - Inf. Part. Present Imperfect I. κείμεθα I. [έκείμεθα] 2. [κείσθε] 2. [εκεισθε] 3. κεΐνται „ 3· εκειντο κεΐσθαι κείμενος, -η, -ον § 22. είμι, I am going, occurs only in compounds in the New Testament. Indic. S. - P. λ Stem I-, εί- Present 1. - 2. - 3· - 1. - 2. - 3- -Τάσι -ίέναι Imperfect 1. ’ - 2. - . 3· “T i« 1. - 2. - . 3· -ίεσαν -ίων, -ίο Οσα, -ίόν. Inf. Part. Classes of Verbs 232 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR CO a O • T“H 43 cd o CD co -M d . S d g 5 o «44 4-3 O O U u o a CD 4-3 in *P *ri co C» a) > X v £G Λ £ 4-3 CO o ° in x g *g .2 •Q +3 CD «-Η rd O 4^ I * o u Pd ^3 «> e5 & H > 0 CO ^ w £ M?5 O cd t/ι *4 O a r£ S u m CD i > *6 M d CD d u CD o *S * a £ H O cd £ £ 43 d o rd o o u u o Co . 3 S "§ 2 CO in in < •J o d £ o > o Pd CD -d cd cd a CD rd '4_> CM d C03 5 «ο <3 CO 8 4-3 a CO 1 Cd § rP 43 CO CD 4-3 > d i=* CE3 •ς^ -i=* v- d CD <5> <0 * «S> CO CD H-i U 3 Oh ·-» 8 C^> HO CD A. rd 43 CO Fut. 0 fc> -ί=· > SC cd 3 Q> to £ CO u «50 d r-Si < D Ph Ph o to 2. κάθ-ημαι, I sit καθήσομαι 3· κείμαι, I lie 4. φημί, I say §25. Second Class. The non-thematic reduplicated present. The reduplicated verb-stem without the thematic vowel appears as the present. CLASSES OF VERBS 233 to «ο S3 V. «Ο > 3" > p- > S=· ί=· CD i=- s*u *8 MU MU S i=* S3 <33 V* w> δ 60 JZ *ω 8 «-» £$ to «ο si 8 3, O rL I-* > rt — * o K3 3 MU »-» tu <33 • ω <50 ·+-> 1 . 8 Q* • O <0 8 VP 8 Si S3 • N 3 << -O H 3 N ^3 8 o Vk.» to N • ϊ“ }C "8 l·· (N *8 -8 "8 • M ci tOS M oi CO 234 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR > g «0 > X > X > cr > > > X CD > n i3 CD t> Vfc_> tu Mfc^» tu «to 7* > > Χ MU * CD Cs X "8 'X MU 1 MU ·Ό> m CD MU MU iH e «-» cu to 8 to ·-» 8 rL CD «ο «-» •X «to 8 rL X 3* 8 rL X 3* 8 rL X «_» d. rL 8 Ο¬ 8 rL X tu 8 rL X X D tu t* t) rd 4-> g «ο <3 X 8 rL t> «_» ω «fc> 8 rL «>» U) MU MU o Χ 60 X X «to X > ;> > MU 'tu MU ω o -to MU ~8 'X r}=* X to H 'w' — ^ *+-« ^ X X 8 2< > £ 8 >; 3 ω I Γ» fc> ■>.kj & ω & 8 fc> O 4-* tu in «ο 4- «to CD bfl ~v) G 1 o -e £ s 8 CD »-» O MU ti 8 8 X N 3 c* tu fc> Θ* mu "ω fc> H JJLP 3*^ 3· MU o MU „ > > > O' _ *8 *X ΛΧ -p fctU MU fctU O- •± '8 JJLP 8 JJO* 8 fc> t> tu X D tu t* in bX) to • V 8 fc> a»-» > o ti > o X tu o X '8 Λ cj tu «fc» 3 60 ^o i-i· * 4-3 H r\ X Q- MU ^tu itU MU MU t_, X fctu fctu ttu Fut. 3 jjj* «■— ■ o 8 rL o JJLP 3 -3* "8 «.» 8 rL o JJLP 3 3 t> 'ω X > Q- Ο¬ MU 'X 8 ^8 *8 Χ 60 to-p X s «to to S «to <2. X «_» O > "8 3 X Mfc_» o > '8 8 •«4 «to «to • -4 «SO • rCi «to «to toto § «to «to V. «to o tu t-* fc> «to «to **4 *-4 «to ►c> > I 3 tu Ir* t> 3 v=> ° tu t* t> lo VO IX 00 I 8 vJ* ' — ' 'tU 3 *8 '8 * ^.r • · . Ο I-I Q\ M t-H m Ή «a C$ 0) .2 rt vu τΰ CD £ O > o • H 4-> Ctf 8 in CD CD m A Λ -X tQ . ccj »*C> CD fe< 8 «to «ο «to 3 JL t> o* tu tu H X «to <3 v 3 «to «to Ά l’. 5 x 3 3 CD t' V«J V«J tu tu H X 8 rL o JUL P o tu Θ- C5 «to 4» «ο X ^ fc, ^ Λ I t- J— « 3 Ά θ* 3 3 l·’ X 'X ** Θ- H Ol CO Tt· § 28. Fifth Class. The reduplicated thematic present. The thematic vowel % is added to the reduplicated (c in redupl.) verb-stem. The verb-stem shows syncope of the stem vowel. CLASSES OF VERBS 235 • > to to i=* > Q ar> f=- -i=* ce> V ρ¬ ω X VO O >— t* VO VO • «ο to 8 tL S=* to > -ω ?— &4 ω Ό <3 V* to <0 *<4 S 8 to 8 * 3 t* VO > S=* d. p- 8 > -o o o p- fc> t> X to to to to H L» VO fctO *C0 su> 8 8 i t* (O N 8 ri. o V , ^ ^ - X ^ mo d. * C 3 ? w ^ £ S.»J VkO 01 I * to t* 3 V» X V»_l Jr* CO H % s CD 43 co I U CD > o ' t-4 43 Oj xz> d. O 'S=- o o sj ccj ρ¬ fc> JULP ω to -ω « — -se CT5 -tv, CO • pSi t* H to t"4 1 H ' CD c> K co Ό to ►c V ■V» 4. 8 CO ? S >"4 - o *"4 to >O '"4 in < . 1 £h 3Γ CD t V? CJ f W ^ b x ύ © CO 9 co oov X i Oh ^ 0) ^ rd ,ϋ| u o <44 a u o <4-1 CO - CO to £ to <Γ> <3 to ^ -p δ 8 cQ. ^ MO to to ■CL 8 rL to m-» t* δ '« CL cO. ^ to cQ- > ί=· '3 t> MO 8 zi, to 3 t> MO t> tr* f fc> to a Vh o t+— ( o 4-3 to P* ^ -3 Γ. CE> ■ <4 iT K Q P· ^ "8 -Μ * 4o H N MO I to to <3 ■CL 8 I a u o MO *44 8 N- 8 =» ZL «μ ^ -g* 8 « X f Cl to mo X f Q- » rv ί3 > ci · tH b +-> CU O . i=* to CO to > <3 S=· '» -CL r< > ° . p S V. J— J- O- H -μτ *μτ to -j § « ■*· ,< to i- 8 zL fV }- °- ^ fcS=- tof=- •w» to <3 to Os 8 8 >— 8 ϊ< 8 * m~0 H r< Q- ?< 'to 3 to MO xj=- !< to ΧΛ • r-H £ >~ u o to <3 8 X r> o- v-, 'S=- £ δ Os X 8 r< r< in £ Q- Ito 1 • ■**<» to 8 ϋ > |D r< 8 1 r* H u 1 to MO Q to }- Ir* t-M Ds fti=- r< ,£ 8 8 to •rs> V. o to J-U* 8 »-* 8 'to 8 to •“8 fci C4 ϊ< o- 3 cd. MO >: to MO !=ί=· ^to S — y i V. to m CD a • rH 4-3 8 iJJ' to 3 8 (4 JJU» '5=* 8 X f mo sto a) 3 a-» 8 3 a Jtr zL to Ir· 8 *3 a-> & r< 3 JJLP -8 CL. 3 to -3 o m 'TJ Fut . 'to o. i=* X o up '8 l·* cQu <4 MO X to CJ d to Ό Si to •<4 ΣΧ S a • rH in a 0) 40 m 40 • i-H is 'to Q. to i Τ'- to I Q- ·>» I •\ > — - I Q- tO I Τ' to Q- at-» 8 i a o3 8 r-C 8 T- to •3 ? x v. >— 8 'to ^ a i; ^ fcj=- »-f=- -« »3 -L ^ S j- bt ?~ "8 - -8 »3 > to «r* «3 o <4 *8 "8 •4 s to to to ΐ 3 r-C 'to ϊ~ ”8 to to 4 I a- ”8 3 CL. S'* 8 i T- to >: I o ti ”8 3 > to t* i< o & *8 μ Μ tO CLASSES OF VERBS 237 X > X O i=- - Ο¬ Χ t> “8 (> '8 Xl rG 40 MU MU MU MU MU 8 d- c 3- to 8 d. 8 d- Q. 8 d- r< <23. -j=- x --ω ^ mo „ CO. MU X fctU ϊ~ Q- 8 ' ^ t> 8 S. « ω C Q. 03- -JD X MU V. SO 03. mu X 8 X r< X O 8 8 Q- X — X ω x 8 tu Ο¬ H i- <23- Ϊ— Χ t> -ω fctu *i=- fctU ito •3 r< «3 Q- ω •3 X *3 Q- 8 to ?s 0 Ό δ κ Vs-/ X M/ 3 3 3 Q- 3 Q- rC ω X V.J S»J ω "8 JM Ο¬ <23- MU Χ t> cs ~8 U > 03 Oj 03 d- -ί=· r< MU 8 d. d. J=- r< i" ω x ί=· CD M3 fc* MU Ό 8 Ss* <0 •3 8 8 X i=- V» Q- '8 d- ►*=· 8 t> t* 8 8 X 8 Θ- JD s^· 8 8 0 <23- rL & s^· i:U> siu fetu X o X D V* a 8 0 d. 0 CO 3 t2 - § 0 >4 'i=* 8 d. X 8 fc> • X CxO G • 1— ♦ 8 k. t* Q- 8 d- d. 0 0 -9- t> d- -JD -iD 8 d. 0 "8 <23- <-< t: G • rH cti -4-3 G O o X a W cti *G <3 8 to '8 V* Q- 8 d- ►8 to -8 8 8 x 8 to 8 ^ k, CcO λ t*M "Τ' ^~s <23. G CD ►8 8 ·*» 3=j 1 8 <23- 8 r< 8 r i. 8 to <3 ►8 D t* 3 X 3 x '8 <23- 3 X '8 Λ 8 8 8 <23- r< rL £ § v8 3 * ^ D £ p M CO i- 10 vO Q. X <υ 4-3 <Λ ο in *d <υ *d *d Oj s α> CO aJ X * s w aj X3 3 X 'o. X ctf X £ d 03 Tt* *0 Ό tM. CO O', c. With the suffix τ. The verb-stem is always a labial mute (x, β, φ) . β or φ changes to x before τ. Present Fut. Aorist Per}, act. Per], pass. A or. pass. 238 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR > > P CD Θ- -O > P P CD 8 β- X X ►ω Hi) » zL o '8 X ω X 8 3 40 .<3 i β- *8 3 t* fW X3 C D ’d *d ctf CO X to *d G " g S O • rH C/5 ' I Q P o o Q a » rH •,H CO s n 2 § ? s rQ ^ Vh +-> CD C/5 > 3 *d CD u in 8 g 3 •s* • rH -p CD 6 o CO o 3 r< -IV a 8 Ό X X X to v. P 3 » O 3 3 X to as ■M X T s 3 # cQ. D Q C/5 8 Τ' μ CD X rQ ' — ·' ο -P 3 X rQ 4-3 o 3 t» Η • rH is 8 X X Λ • c* CO u CD > CD *d dJ aJ C/5 • rH X t> ctJ a • rH c/} d Q CD CD 4J C/5 i rQ CD > to to 3 .«o «ο 3 3 3 P p CD > Q. CO O *HU •HU W 8 rL to 3 i- feW 8 X 8 8 P X X Co b* >— JD ' — ^ few W o > 8 CD MO N 8 ri o o > 8 CD O ti "8 (xo 8 *r^ "3 s 3 ►ή 8 CD o "8 8 JJLP 8 > 3 Q. Q. >- iH3 O »-D feW •HU w W 8 rL 3 3 o JLU» to to '8 'P ■3 <50 o. > •r> i- 40 W 3 8 rce o > }~ «8 3 3 ■w c3 ^ *-H I X ^ 8 i 40 Q- o 3 § 3 -s=* X > to ° ^ H - *8 J- 40 ω 3 3 * * to t> "8 — 40 °- — o 40 U> Η N CO Tt n Cl e. With the suffix Θ. Only a few verbs in this division. . Ισθω (εσ-), I am eating . νήθω (να-), I spin CLASSES OF VERBS co JX m & ΙΠ · rH G -m in O Ih CD X CD in in ί=* <χ> θ- *3 > ί=* α=> Η ΜΟ > ·>*=* > If 2 jti d κ· ϋ ιη «* » ^ § 1-1 4-> CD Oh 0 8 2 α g Ή <3 Μ> * » ν' α. '3 •vj ~ω 4J Ο G ιη • r-l to X 1η CD > Ο 0 α ο bJO α ο a · rH α+ α 0 ιη G 0 4-> α 0 ιη 0 u Ρη 0 •5 κ > ο X > Ο > ο dL 8 c> 8 ο> (V- > to ft Ο I 8 X G Ο Ιη • rH G -4H X 4-5 8 rL 8 b£ to • rH G O MH 0 0 }^ r L 0 O rH "8 X CO G ftO ιη ιη μη < ο η4 Ο W Η W > « C/2 ■Η +-> 0 ? > X Ιη 0 > ιη -+Η ιη ιη G Ο ο 02 ιη d r— I Ο in 0 Λ •ηπ ε ο «Η ΜΗ 4Π α 0 U 0 ■ν* «Ο « «ο * •ή <ο fti I fc> ΉΟ I 8 Q- ♦Ό O - w Λ itl H· r-t r0 3 3 CD '8 b Q. •HO H? M ft— o S £ * ►"i Ci >C •s. 'T' ^ X _-T ω •'Τ' ? ^ . V, ω €> 3 W X 3 Ηλ> CL. Q* MO t* e>- C0 rf CO 'ϋ CO • rH Λ 4Π *d 0 *d o G • rH 0 XI ctf a to X 1-1 0 ί> 1h 0 X 4Π o ix § § *d g cd -g 0 ti 0 Λ 0 X to 0 b/) G cj X o o X CO a bp O G X X ΛΊ2 3 § ’d G O 0 In 0 to i- CO 0 g 0 ε ^ s ε 8 ϊ> x O 0 rH 0 O N X O H ' 3X1 239 4· A lingual mute before a lingual mute becomes σ. 5· A mute of the stem before a mute of the personal ending becomes coordinate, as βτ>χτ, φτ > ιυτ, γτ>κτ, χτ>κτ, πθ>φθ, βΟ>φθ, κθ>χθ, γθ>χθ. 6. σ coming between two consonants is dropped. Perfect indicative middle (and passive) of τάσσω γράφω χείθω 240 BEGINNER’S GREEK GRAMMAR ω rL rL 83 Q. ω ί- -to co a d ^ co ,rM 0 a ti δ ω <υ P 3 in 0 p ·*» 8 w · 8 8 CD to ω o > ^to 4-3 a 0 O rL 8 Ir* rL Ξ1· K *44 f . • pw 'oT CD ·*» to to to — ■ . to to «-» u to 0 8 > CO H ω to H *40 to H -to to H -to to ω to N -to to P 3 to ►54- • rt C/5 C/5 & £ & N H *—H P «-J O > cd P t> ω 0 Λ 4-> p -to rL rL 8 o. ω (O O CD 8 m-» O O cr 8 J-4 ·.-» CD > o. • 8 *-> 8 to to -ω rH 5— rL 8 tr> rL CD rL δ -to jrj «> rL -£> H rL rL 0 • T-t 8 8 8 8 k8 8 8 4-3 4-3 o 0 *44 Q. O. Q. Q. CL. Q. a. CO -to i— i— t“· >- >- 0 N — * to -to -to -to to -to to Ϊ— J— Λ 8" l-l § » S 1:5 >*=· u O o 0 3 *2 's δ ~ a d 0 a, » rH o » rH 4-3 Ih Gj Λ p a o o 0 It— t TO ^to to 8 o *3 *3 CD > 8 ^3 a to o> -to rL 8 rL CD rL 5- ?— JJO* >: X >- 8 8 8 8 "8 8 8 f t* f l* b* »r* to -to -ω -to ω -to ti> tr* f f Ir* l·* f 14 4-> CD ω M-ι rL ο n 0 0 ^ Λ C/5 «-4-3 4-3 0 ί~ .. . CL-, b/> W a ^ Clj -to O „ o t* t* 8 Q. -tO aj 1-4 3 a 0 δ cd co 0 ft’s 0 j— £ -tO £ o C/5 u 0 P δ *4 0 4-» CO o - u · 'j* O · r-t 4-3 •ο-Λ w 8 4-> $d ■ / ' ■ . . . V VOCABULARIES GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY A αγαθός, -ή, -όν, good άγαχάω, I love άγάχη, -ης, ή, love άγαχητός, -ή, -όν, beloved άγγελος, -ου, ό, messenger , angel αγιάζω, I sanctify άγιος, -α, -ον, holy αγοράζω, I buy άγω, / lead , bring , ga; sec. aor., ήγαγον. άδελφός, -οΰ, δ, brother άδικος, -ον, unrighteous αδύνατος, -ον, unable, impos¬ sible αίμα, -ατος, τό, blood αίρω, I take up, bear αισθάνομαι, / perceive αιτέω, I ask for (something) αιών, -ώνος, 6, age (space of time), world αιώνιος, -a, -ov, eternal άκάθαρτος, -ov, unclean άκολουθέω, I follow ακούω, I hear άκριβώς, adv., accurately αλέκτωρ, -ορος, δ, cock αλήθεια, -ας, ή, truth αληθής, -ές, αληθινός, -ή, -όν, /rwe αληθώς, adv., truly, surely αλλά, adversative conj., buf άλλήλων, (gen. masc. plu.), of one another άλλος, -η, -o, other άλλότριος, -α, -ον, belong¬ ing to another (another’s), strange αμαρτάνω, I sin αμαρτία, -ας, ή, mVi άμήν, adv., truly, verily άμχελών, -ώνος, δ, vineyard άν, see page 157 άνά, prep., on, upon, along; only used with acc. in N. T. άναβαίνω, I go up, come up, ascend άναβλέχω, I look up, recover sight άναγινώσκω, I read άνάστασις, -εως, ή, resurrec¬ tion άνεμος, -ου, δ, wind άνήρ, άνδρός, δ, man άνθίστημι, I set against, with¬ stand άνθρωχος, -ου, δ, man άνίστημι, I raise up, rise, arise άνοίγω, I open άντί, prep., with gen., opposite, against; instead of, in place ' of, for άνω, adv., up, above άνωθεν, adv., from above, again άξιος, -a, -ov, fitting, worthy 255 256 GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY απαγγέλλω, I announce , de¬ clare άπαρνέομαι, I deny άπας, άπασα, άπαν, all , gether απέρχομαι, I go away απέχω, I keep off, have in full (of receipts); midd., I keep myself from, abstain από, prep .,from off, used only with the abl. in the N. T. άποδίδωμι, I give up, give back, restore; pay; midd., sell αποθνήσκω, I die αποκρίνομαι, I answer άποκτείνω, I kill, slay απολύω, I release αποστέλλω, I send forth απόστολος, -ου, δ, apostle απτω, I fasten to; midd., άπτ- ομαι, I touch άρνέομαι, I deny άρτι, adv., now, just now, this moment άρτος, -ου, δ, bread αρχή, -ής, ή, beginning άρχιερευς, -έως, δ, chief priest άρχομαι, I begin αρχών, -οντος, δ, ruler, prince ασθένεια, -ας, ή, weakness ασθενής, -ές, weak, sick αυριον, adv., tomorrow αυτός, -ή, -ό, self, very, same; he, she, it άφεσις, -εως, ή, remission, for¬ giveness άφίημι, I send away, forgive , leave, let άφίστημι, I put away, depart from άφρων, -ον, foolish B βαίνω, I go βάλλω, I throw, cast βαπτίζω, I baptize βασιλεία, -ας, ή, kingdom βασιλεύς, -έως, δ, king βασιλεύω, I am king, I reign βιβλίον, -ου,τ:ό, book , a written document βίος, -ου, δ, life, manner of life βλέπω, I see, look at, behold βούλομαι, I will, wish Γ γάμος, -ου, δ, marriage γάρ, coordinating conj., for. γέ, enclitic, postpositive parti¬ cle giving especial promi¬ nence to a word, indeed, at last γεννάω, I beget γένος, -ους, τό, race , kind γή, ή, earth γίνομαι, I become, be γινώσκω, I know γλώσσα, -ης, ή, tongue γνώσις, -εως, ή, knowledge γόνυ, -νατος, τό, knee γράμμα, -ατος, τό, letter (of alphabet), writing γραμματευς, -έως, δ, scribe, town-clerk γραφή, -ής, ή, writing , scrip¬ ture γράφω, I write γυνή, -ναικός, ή, woman, wife Δ δαιμόνιον, -ου, τό, demon, evil- spirit GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 257 δέ, copulative and adversative (milder than αλλά) conj., postpositive, in the next place , and ; hut, on the other hand Bst, it is necessary δεύτερος, -a, -ov, second διά, prep., with gen., through, by; with acc., because of, on account of, for the sake of διάβολος, -ου, o, devil διαθήκη, -ης, ή, covenant, tes¬ tament διακονέω, I serve, minister διακονία, -ας, ή, service, min¬ istry διάκονος, -ου, δ, servant, min¬ ister, deacon διαλογίζομαι, I reason with, discuss, consider διάνοια, -ας, ή, mind, under¬ standing διδάσκαλος, -ου, 6, teacher διδάσκω, I teach δίδωμι, I give, deliver διέρχομαι, I go through δίκαιος, -a, -ov, righteous δικαιοσύνη, -ης, ή, righteous¬ ness δικαιόω, I declare righteous , justify διψάω, I thirst διώκω, I follow after, pursue, persecute δοκέω, I think, suppose; δοκεΐ, it seems good δόξα, -ης, ή, glory δοξάζω, I glorify δουλεύω, I am a servant, I serve δούλος, -ου, δ, servant δύναμαι, I am able, can δύναμις, -εως, ή, power δυνατός, -ή, -όν, able δύο, two δώδεκα, twelve δώρον, -ου, τό, gift Ε έάν, conditional particle, if έάν μή, with a substantive = except, unless εαυτού, -ής, -ού, (rarely αυτού, -ής, -ού), reflexive, himself, herself, itself εβαλον, I threw, cast; sec. aor. of βάλλω. εβην, I went; μι- aorist of βαίνω. έγενόμην, I became; sec. aor. of γίνομαι. εγνων, I knew; μι- aorist of γινώσκω. έγράφην, sec. aor. passive of γράφω. έγγύς, adv., near έγείρω, I raise up έγώ, I έθνος, -ους, τό, race, nation έθος, -ους, τό, custom εί, conditional particle, if εί μή, with a substantive = except, unless είδον, I saw; sec. aor.; δράω used in present είμί, I am ειχον, είχα, I said; sec. aor.; λέγω used in present ειρήνη, -ης, ή, peace εις, prep., into, used only with the acc. είς, μία, εν, one 25 8 GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY εισάγω, I bring in εισέρχομαι I enter έκ (έξ), prep., out, out of , from within , used only with the abl. εκβάλλω, I throw out, cast out έκεΐ, adv., there έκεΐνος, -η, -o, demons, pron., that {one) έκκλησία, -ας, ή, assembly, church έκχορευομαι, I go out έκτείνω, I stretch out έλαβον, I took; sec. aor. of λαμβάνω. έλεος, -ους, τό, pity, mercy έλεόθερος, -α, -ον, free έλχίζω, I hope έλχίς, -ίδος, ή, hope έλιχον, I left; sec. aor. of λείχω. έμαυτοϋ, -ής, reflexive pron., myself έμ βαίνω, I go into, embark έμός, -ή, όν, poss. pron., my, mine έν, prep., in; used only with the loc. έντολή, -ής, ή, commandment ένώχιον, prep, with gen., be¬ fore, in the presence of έξέρχομαι, I go out; sec. aor. έξήλθον. £ξεστιν, it is lawful, is possible έξίστημι, I am amazed, am be¬ side myself έξουσία, -ας, ή, authority, power εξω, adv., without, outside; used with abl., without, out¬ side έορτή, -ής, ή, feast . , έχαγγελία, -ας, ή, promise έχαόριον, adv., on the morrow έχε ρωτάω, I question, ask (a question) έχιγινώσκω, I recognize, dis¬ cover έχιδίδωμι, I give over έχιΟυμία, -ας, ή, desire έχιθυμέω, I desire έχιμένω, I remain, abide έχιτίθημ.ι, I lay upon, place upon έργασία, -ας, ή, work, busi¬ ness έργον, -ου, τό, work έρημος, -ου, ή, wilderness , desert έρχομαι, I go, come έ ρωτάω, I ask (question) έσθίω, I eat; έφαγον, I ate έσχατος, -η, -ον, last έσχον, I got; sec. aor. of έχω. έτερος, -α, -ον, another έτος, -ους, τό, year ευ, adv., well ευαγγελίζομαι, / proclaim glad tidings (preach the gospel) ευθέως, adv., straightway , at once ευρίσκω, I find ευρον, I found; sec. aor. of ευρίσκω. έφαγον, I ate; sec. aor.; έσθίω used in present Έφέσιος, -a, -ov, Ephesian ; έφίστημι, / stand upon or by, come upon έφυγον, sec. aor. of φεύγω, έχω, / have, hold, get GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 259 Z ζάω, I live ζηλόω, I am jealous , desire eagerly ζητέω, I seek ζωή, -ής, ή, life Η ή, conj., or ήγεμών, -όνος, δ, leader , gov¬ ernor ήΒειν, old pluperf. (with pres. meaning) of oIBa. ήλθον, I went , came; sec. aor.; έρχομαι used in present ήλιος, -ου, 6, sun ήμερα, -ας, ή, day ήμέτερος, -α, -ον, poss. pron., our Θ θάλασσα, -ης, ή, sea θάνατος, -ου, δ, death θανατόω, I put to death θαυμάζω, I wonder , marvel θεάομαι, I behold , see, look at θέλημα, -ατος, τό, will θέλω, I wish, will θεός, -οϋ, δ, God θεραχεύω, I heal, doctor θεωρέω, I look at, gaze, see θλίψις, -εως, ή, tribulation, distress θρίξ, τριχός, ή, hair θρόνος, -ου, δ, throne θυγάτηρ, -τρός, ή, daughter I ίάομαι, I heal ϊΒιος, -α, -ον, one’s own ιερόν, -οΰ, τό, temple ιερεύς, -έως, δ, priest ιημι, I send ινα, conj. generally with sub¬ junctive, in order that, that ίμάτιον, -ou, τό, garment ι στη μι, I make to stand, place , stand ισχυρός, -ά, -όν, strong κ καθαρίζω, I purify καθίστημι, I set down, appoint καί, conj., and; also; even; και . . . καί, both . . . and κακός, -ή, -όν, evil, bad καλέω, I call καλός, -ή, -όν, good, beautiful καλώς, adv., well, finely καρδία, -ας, ή, heart καρχός, -οϋ, δ, fruit κατά, prep., with gen., down {upon), against; with abl., down {from) ; with acc., down {along), through, according to κατα βαίνω, I am going down καταλύω, I destroy κατεσθίω, I cat up κείμαι, I lie {am laid) κεφαλή, -ής, ή, head κηρύσσω, I announce, proclaim κοινός, -ή, -όν, common, un¬ clean κοινόω, / make common, un¬ clean κόχτω, I beat, strike κόσμος, -ου, δ, world κράβαττος, -ου, δ, pallet, bed κράζω, / cry 0^/ κρίμα, -ατος, τό, judgment 260 GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY κρίνω, I judge κρίσις, -εως, ή, judgment κρύχτω, I hide κτίσις, -εως, ή, creation κυριεύω, I am lord of, rule {over) with gen. κύριος, -ου, δ, Lord κύων, κυνός, δ, dog κωλύω, I hinder κώμη, -ης, ή, village Λ λαλέω, I speak λαμβάνω, I take , receive; sec. aor., έλαβον. λαός, -ού, δ, people λέγω, I say , speak λείχω, I leave , abandon; sec. aor., έλιχον. ληστής, -οΰ, δ, robber λίθος, -ου, δ, stone λίψ, λιβός, δ, the S. W. wind λόγος, -ου, δ, word λούω, I wash λυχέω, I grieve λύω, 1 loose Μ μαθητής, -ου, δ, disciple μακάριος, -α, -ον, happy , blessed μάλλον, adv., more, rather μανθάνω, I learn; sec. aor., εμαθον. μαρτυρέω, I bear witness , tes¬ tify μάστιξ, -ιγος, ή, whip, scourge, plague μάχαιρα, -ας, ή, szwri μέγας, μεγάλη, μέγα, great μέλει, it concerns, is a care, with dat. μέλλω, I am about (or going) to do something μέλος, -ους, τό, member μένω, I remain μέρος, -ους, τό, part μετά, prep., with gen., with; with acc., after; μετά ταΰτα, after these things, after this μεταβαίνω, I pass over , de¬ part μετανοέω, I repent μή, not μηδείς, μηδεμία, μηδέν, no one, nothing μήτε . . . μήτε, neither . . . nor μήτηρ, -τρός, ή, mother μικρός, -ά, -όν, small, little μισέω, I hate μισθός, -οΰ, δ, pay, wages, reward μνά, μνας, ή, mina (a weight and a sum of money) μνημεΐον, -ou, τό, sepulchre, tomb μνημονεύω, I remember, with gen. μονογενής, -ές, only begotten μόνον, adv., only μόνος, -η, -ον, only, alone μυστήριον, -ou, τό, mystery N ναός, -ou, δ, temple νεανίας, -ou, δ, youth νεκρός, -ά, -όν, dead νέος, -α, -ον, young, new νεφέλη, -ης, ή, cloud GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 261 νεωκόρος, -ου, 6 or ή, temple- keeper νηστεύω, I fast νικάω, I conquer νίπτω, / wash νομίζω, I think , suppose νόμος, -ου, o, law νΰν, adv., now νυξ, νυκτός, ή, night Ο δ, ή, τό, the definite article the δδός, -οΰ, ή, way, road οίδα, I know οικία, -ας, ή, house οίκοδομέω, I build οίκος, -ου, δ, house οίνος, -ου, δ, wine όλίγος, -η, -ον, few, little, small δλος, -η, -ον, whole δμοιόω, I make like δμολογέω, I agree with, confess δνομα, -ατος, τό, name δπου, rel. adv., where δχτομαι, I see δράω, I see; fut., οψομαι; sec. aor., είδον 8ς, η, δ, rel. pron., who, which, that, what δστις, ήτις, ότι, indef. rel. pron., who, which, that, what δταν, rel. temporal adv. used with the subj. and ind., whenever, when δτε, rel. temporal adv. used t with the ind., when δτι, conj., because, that ο ύ, not; ο ύκ before vowels; ο υχ before rough breathing ού μή, see page 173 ου δεις, ούδεμία, ούδέν, no one {nobody), nothing ούκέτι, no longer, no more ουρανός, -οΰ, δ, heaven ους, ώτός, τό, ear οΰτε . . . ούτε, neither . . , nor ουτος, αυτή, τοΰτο, demons. pron., this {one) όφείλω, I owe, ought; sec. aor. without augment, οφελον όφθαλμός, -οΰ, δ, eye δχλος, -ου, δ, crowd οψομαι, fut. midd., I shall see; δράω used in present Π παιδίον, -ου, τό, little child παλαιός, -ά, -όν, old, ancient πάλιν, adv., again παρά, prep., with the loc., by or at (the side of); with the abl., from (the side of); with the acc., along (side of) παραβολή, -ής, ή, parable παραδίδωμι, I give over (to another), deliver up, betray παρακαλέω, I beseech, exhort, encourage παράκλησις, -εως, ή, exhorta¬ tion παραλαμβάνο), I take, receive; sec. aor., παρέλαβον παρατίθημι, I set before, com¬ mit παρέχω, I provide, supply παρίστημι, I place beside, stand by παρουσία, -ας, ή, coming, pres¬ ence πάς, πάσα, πάν, all, every 262 GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY πάσχα, (indeclinable), τό, the Passover πάσχω, I suffer; sec. aor., επαθον πατήρ, -τρός, δ, father παύω, I stop; midd., παύομαι, I cease •πείθω, I persuade πεινάω, I hunger, am hungry πειράζω, I test , tempt χέμχω, I send περί, prep., with gen., about, concerning; with abl., from around; with acc., round about , about , concerning χερ ιάγω,/ go about, carry about περιπατέω, I walk, live περισσός, -ή, -όν, abundant πιστεύω, I believe χίστις, -εως, ή, faith πιστός, -ή, -όν, faithful πλανάω, I cause to wander (to err), lead astray πλήθος, -ους, τό, crowd, multi¬ tude χληρόω, I make full, fill πλησίον, adv., near; b πλησίον, neighbor πλοϊον, -o i) , τό, boat πλούσιος, -a, -o v, rich πνεύμα, -ατος, τό, spirit πόθεν, interrog. adv., whence ποιέω, I do, make ποιμήν, -ένος, 6, shepherd πόλις, -εως, ή, city πολύ, adv., much πολύς, πολλή, πολύ, much, many πονηρός, -ά, -όν, evil πορεύομαι, I go, proceed ποτήριον* -ου, τό, cup πού, interrog. adv., where πούς, ποδός, δ, foot πρεσβύτερος, -ου, δ, elder πρίν (ή), before; see page 190 πρό, prep, with abl., before προάγω, I lead forth, go before πρόβατον, -ου, τό, sheep πρός, prep., with loc., near, by; with acc., towards, to; with abl. (once), “from the point of view ofu προσέρχομαι, 1 go to, come to προσευχή, -ής, ή, prayer προστίθημι, I add, give in addi¬ tion πρόσωπον, -ου, τό, face προφητεύω, I prophesy προφήτης, -ου, δ, prophet πρώτος, -η, -ον, first πώποτε, adv., ever yet πώς, adv., how P ρήμα, -ατος, τό, word Σ σάββατον, -ου, τό, Sabbath σαλεύω, I shake σάλπιγξ, -ιγγος, ή, trumpet σάρξ, σαρκός, -η, flesh σεαυτού, -ής, reflexive, thyself σημεϊον, -ου, τό, sign σήμερον, adv., to-day, this day σιγάω, I am silent , keep silence σιωπάω, I am silent, keep si¬ lence σκανδαλίζω, I cause to stumble, offend σκηνόω, I dwell (as in a tent) GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 263 σκόλοψ, -oxo ς, o stake , thorn σκοτία, -ας, ή, darkness σκότος, -ους, τό, darkness σός, σή, σόν, poss. pron., thy , thine σοφία, -ας, ή, wisdom σοφός, -ή, -όν, wise σχείρω, I sow σχέρμα, -ατος, τό, seed σταυρός, -οΰ, ό, cress σταυρόω, I crucify στέλλω, / send στενάζω, / gmm στόμα, -ατος, τό, mouth στρέφω, / turn, change συ, thou {you) σύν, prep., wi/Λ, used only with the instrumental συνάγω, I gather together συναγωγή, -ής, ή, synagogue συνεσΟίω, I eat with (someone) συνίημι, I perceive συνίστημι, I commend, establish σύρω, I drag, draw σώζω, I save σώμα, -ατος, τό, body σωτήρ, -ήρος, ό, Saviour σωτηρία, -ας, ή, salvation σώφρων, -ον, of sound mind, sober-minded T ταχεινόω, I make low, humble ταχέως, adv., quickly ταχύ, adv., quickly τέ . . . καί, both . . . and τέκνον, -ου, τό, child τέλειος, -α, -ον, finished, com¬ plete τελειόω, 1 end, complete, fulfill τελευτάω, (/ finish), I die τελέω, I finish, end, com¬ plete τέλος, -ους, τό, end τέσσαρες, τέσσαρα, four τέταρτος, -η, -ον, fourth τη ρέω, I keep τίθημι, I place, lay, put down τιμάω, I honor τίς, τί, interrog. pron., who, which, what τις, τι, indef. pron., one, a cer¬ tain one, a certain thing; some one, something τολμάω, I dare τόχος, -ou, 6, place τότε, adv., then τούτο, see ουτος τρεις, τρία, three τρίτος, -η, -ον, third τυφλός, -ή, -όν, blind τυφλόω, I make blind, blind Υ υγιής, -ές, whole, healthy ύδωρ, υδατος, τό, water υιός, -οΰ, ό, son υμέτερος, -α, -ον, poss. pron., your υχάγω, I go away, depart ύχέρ, prep., with abl., in be¬ half of, in the interest of; instead of; in place of; for the sake of; about, concerning; with acc., over, above, be¬ yond 6χό, prep., with abl., by; with acc., under υχοκριτής, -οΰ, ό, pretender , hypocrite 264 GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY Φ φαίνω, I shine , appear φανερός, -ά, -όν, manifest φανερόω, I make manifest φέρω, I bear, carry φεύγω, I flee, lake flight; sec. aor., εφυγον φιλέω, I love φίλος, -ου, δ, friend φοβέομαι, I am afraid, I fear φόβος, -ου, δ, fear φυλάσσω, I guard, keep φωνέω, I call, speak aloud φωνή, -ής, ή, voice φώς, φωτός, τό, light X * χαίρω, I rejoice χαρά, -άς, ή, joy χάρις, -ιτος, ή, grace χάρισμα, -ατος, τό, gift, free gift χείρ, χειρός, ή, hand χρεία, -ας, ή, need χρονίζω, I spend time, tarry χρόνος, -ου, δ, time Ψ ψεύστης, -ου, δ, liar ψυχή, -ής, ή, soul Ω ώδε, adv., here, hither ώρα, -ας, ή, hour ως, rel., comp., and temporal adv., as, when ώστε, consecutive particle, so that ώστε, inferential conj., and so, therefore ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY A Abide, μένω, έχιμένω After these things, μετά ταΰτα Am, είμΐ Am able, δύναμαι Am about (to do something). μέλλω And, καί Angel, άγγελος All, χάς, δλος Announce, κηρύσσω Answer, άχοκρίνομαι Apostle, άχόστολος Appoint, καθίστημι Ask (a question), έ ρωτάω B Bad, κακός Baptize, βαχτίζω Bear witness, μαρτυρέω Because ( conj .), ότι Become, γίνομαι Before, χρό with abl . Beget, γεννάω Beginning, αρχή Behold, βλέχω Believe, χιστεύω Blind ( adj .), τυφλός Blind (verb), τυφλόω Boat, χλοϊον Bread, άρτος Brother, αδελφός But, αλλά Buy, άγοράζω By (denoting agent), ύχό with abl. * C Call, καλέω Came to pass, έγένετο Care, it is a, μέλει Cast out, έκ βάλλω Cease, χαύομαι Certain (indef.), τις, τι Child, τέκνον; little child, χαιδίον Christ, Χριστός Church, έκκλησία Come, έρχομαι Commandment, έντολή Commend, συνίστημι Concerning, χερί with gen* Covenant, διαθήκη Crowd, όχλος Crucify, σταυρόω D Darkness, σκοτία, σκότος Daughter, θυγάτηρ Day, ημέρα Dead, νεκρός Defile, κοινόω Demon, δαιμόνιον Depart, άχέρχομαι Destroy, καταλύω 266 ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY Devil, διάβολος Die, αποθνήσκω Disciple, μαθητής Do, χοιέω E Eat, έσθίω Eat up, κατεσθίω Enter, εισέρχομαι Eternal, αιώνιος Every, χάς Evil, κακός Eye, όφθαλμός F Face, χρόσωχον Faith, π ί στις Faithful, πιστός Father, πατήρ Fear, φοβέομαι Find, ευρίσκω First, πρώτος Follow, άκολουθέω Foot, πούς For ( conj .), γάρ Forever, είς τον αίώνα, είς τους αίώνας Forgive, άφίημι Friend, φίλος From, αχό with abl., χαρά with abl. Fulfill, πληρόω G Garment, ίμάτιον Give, δίδωμι Glorify, δοξάζω Glory, δόξα Go, βαίνω, έρχομαι Go away, άπέρχομαι Go to, προσέρχομαι God, Θεός Good, άγαΟός, καλός Gospel, ευαγγέλιον Grace, χάρις Great, μέγας Guard, φυλάσσω Η Hand, χείρ Hate, μισέω Have, έχω He {in the oblique cases), αυτός He himself {intensive), αυτός Heal, θεραπεύω Hear, άκούω Heart, καρό ία Heaven, ουρανός Himself, herself {reflexive), έαυτοΰ, έαυτής Holy, άγιος Hope, έλπίς Hope {verb), έλπίζω Hour, ώρα House, οίκος, οικία How, πώς I I, έγώ If, εί with the ind., έάν with the subj. In, εν with loc. In order that, ϊνα with subj. Into, είς with acc. It {in oblique cases), αυτό It itself {intensive), αυτό Itself {reflexive), έαυτου ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY 267 J Joy, χαρά Judge, κρίνω Judgment, κρίσις Justify, δικαιόω Mother, μήτηρ Multitude, χλήθος Myself ( reflexive , in oblique . cases), έμαυτοΰ, -ής. Mystery, μυστήριον K N Keep, τη ρέω Kill, άχοκτείνω King, βασιλεύς Kingdom, βασιλεία Know, γινώσκω, οίδα Name, ονομα Nation, έθνος Necessary, is, δει New, καινός, νέος Night, νύξ No one, ούδείς • L Not, ού, ούκ, ούχ; μή with subj., inf., and partic. Last, έσχατος Law, νόμος Lawful, is, έξεστι Lay, τίθημι Lay down, τίθημι Lead, άγω Life, ζωή Light, φως Look, βλέχω Look up, άναβλέχω Lord, κύριος Love, άγάχη Love (verb), άγαχάω Nothing, ούδέν Now, νΰν 0 Obtain, έχω On, έν with loc., έχί with loc. One another, άλλήλων Only begotten, μονογενής Other, άλλος Out of, εκ with abl. P M Parable, χαραβολή Part, μέρος Paul, Παύλος Make, χοιέω Man, άνθρωχος Manifest, make, φανερόω Many, χολύς Marvel, θαυμάζω Master, κύριος Mercy, έλεος Month, στόμα Peace, ειρήνη People, λαός Persuade, χείθω Place, τόχος Place upon, έχιτίθημι Power ( authority ), έξουσία Power, δύναμις Preach, κηρύσσω, εύαγγελίζω 268 ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY Priest, ίερεύς Proclaim, κηρύσσω Promise, έχαγγελία Prophet, χροφήτης Pursue, διώκω Q Quickly, ταχέως, τάχα R Raise, έγείρω Rather, μάλλον Receive, λαμβάνω Remain, μένω Righteous, δίκαιος Righteousness, δικαιοσύνη Ruler, αρχών S Sabbath, σάββατον Salute, άσχάζομαι Same, αύτός with the article Sanctify, αγιάζω Save, σώζω Saviour, σωτήρ Scribe, γραμματεύς Scripture, γραφή Sea, θάλασσα See, βλέχω Seed, σχέρμα Seek, ζητέω Send, χέμχω, στέλλω Send forth, άχοστέλλω Servant, δούλος Serve, διακονέω, δουλεύω Shake, σαλεύω She {in the oblique cases), αύτός She herself ( intensive ), αύτός Sheep, χρό βατόν Shepherd, χοιμήν Sin, αμαρτία So that, ώστε Son, υιός · Soul, ψυχή Sow, σχείρω Speak, λέγω, λαλέω Spirit, χνεΰμα Stand, ϊ στη μι Stone, λίθος Strong, ισχυρός Sword, μάχαιρα Synagogue, συναγωγή T Take, λαμβάνω Take away, αίρω, άχαίρω Take up, αϊρω Teach, διδάσκω Teacher, διδάσκαλος Temple, ιερόν Testament, διαθήκη Than, ή That, έκεινος The, b, ή, τό Thief, ληστής Third, τρίτος This, ουτος, αυτή, τούτο Thou, σύ Throne, θρόνος Through, διά with genitive Throw, βάλλω Thyself {reflexive), σεαυτοϋ -ης Touch, άχτομαι Tribulation, θλιψις Truth, άλήθεια Two, δύο ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY 269 U Under, υχό with acc. V Village, κώμη Voice, φωνή W Walk, χεριχατέω Wash, λούω, νίχτω Way, οδός We, ήμείς Well, καλώς, εδ What, see Who When, όταν, δτε Where, χοΰ Who, which, that, what (rela- tive), ος, η, ο Who, which, what? ( interrog .), τίς, τί Whole, όλος Why, τί Will, θέλημα Wisdom, σοφία Wish, θέλω Word, λόγος, ρήμα Work, έργον World, κόσμος Worthy, άξιος Write, γράφω Y You (sing.), συ You (plu.), υμείς / ■ ·.· ( ' ... - ·· ■ ^'Λ ν' - ' ιϊ * - . ■· . •· • .